JP2022121539A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine equipped with a protective cover capable of preventing productivity, safety and durability from decreasing.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes a protective cover 22 protecting a heat generation property rear member 134. The protective cover 22 has a plurality of heat radiation slots 264 formed elongated in a vertical direction that radiate heat from the heat generation property rear member 134 to the outside. The heat radiation slots 264 have a first outwardly spreading part 303 and a second outwardly spreading part 304 formed into outwardly spreading shapes opposite in a plate thickness direction with respect to a boundary 302 in the middle of the plate thickness direction of the protective cover 22. The first outwardly spreading part 303 and the second outwardly spreading part 304 are arranged adjacent to each other via the boundary 302 in the plate thickness direction. In the boundary 302, inner peripheral surfaces of the first outwardly spreading part 303 and the second outwardly spreading part 304 cross in a chevron shape.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 72

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines, arrange ball machines, and slot machines.

As shown in Patent Document 1, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a game board in the main body of the game machine. Game parts such as winning means and movable effect means are arranged respectively.
On the back side of the game board, a performance board case for housing a performance board for controlling various performances and a liquid crystal substrate case for housing a liquid crystal substrate for controlling the liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right sides. A main board case is arranged to accommodate a main board for.
Also, on the back side of the game machine main body, a power supply board case that houses a power supply board for supplying power and a payout board case that houses a payout board for controlling the payout of game balls are arranged back and forth under the main board case. It is Further, on the back side of the main body of the game machine, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the entire effect board case and the liquid crystal board case and the upper part of the main board case from the back side is provided so that it can be attached/detached and opened.
On the back of the back cover, a large number of heat dissipation holes such as long holes and round holes are formed to dissipate heat from exothermic parts such as the performance board case and the liquid crystal board case. The heat from the heat-generating components inside the back cover is radiated to the outside.

JP 2016-144506 A

Conventional back cover heat dissipation holes are tapered with a smaller diameter at the outer (rear side) or inner (front side) open end, and extend in one direction over the entire length of the back cover in the plate thickness direction. tapered holes. In the back cover having a single taper-shaped heat radiation hole, when looking at the angle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole at the outer peripheral edge of the small-diameter side open end and the back or front surface of the back cover, There are two types, one with a small angle and one with a large angle.
If the angle formed by the back surface of the back cover and the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole is made small, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole is tilted and the inclination angle becomes large, resulting in the gap between the heat radiation hole forming part of the mold and the back cover. Since the release resistance is reduced, the release of the molded back cover from the mold is facilitated, which has the advantage of improving the production efficiency of the back cover and preventing deformation of the back cover during release.
However, if the angle formed is small, the outer peripheral portion of the small-diameter side opening edge of the heat dissipation hole becomes thin, so the rigidity of the formation area of the heat dissipation hole on the back cover decreases, and the small-diameter side opening edge of the heat dissipation hole is not When the back cover comes into contact with a member or the like, the contact portion is damaged and looks white, and the appearance of the back cover as a whole is significantly deteriorated. Also, if the edge of the opening on the small diameter side of the heat radiation hole is thin and sharp, there is a risk of injury due to the sharp portion during work.
On the other hand, if the angle formed by the back surface of the back cover and the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole is increased, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole stands upright and the angle of inclination becomes small, so the rigidity of the area where the heat radiation hole is formed in the back cover increases. In addition to the improvement, there is an advantage that damage to the small diameter side opening edge and injury due to the small diameter side opening edge can be prevented.
However, if the angle formed is large, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole will stand upright, increasing the mold release resistance between the molded part of the heat radiation hole of the mold and the back cover. There is a problem that it takes a long time to remove the mold and the production efficiency of the back cover is lowered, and the back cover is likely to be deformed when the mold is released.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a protective cover capable of preventing deterioration in productivity, safety and durability.

The present invention comprises a protective cover for protecting the heat-generating backing member, the protective cover having a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes for radiating heat from the heat-generating backing member to the outside. a first outwardly expanding portion formed outwardly in the plate thickness direction from an intermediate boundary portion of the protective cover in the plate thickness direction toward the exothermic back member side; a second outwardly expanding portion formed outwardly in the plate thickness direction from the boundary portion to the side opposite to the heat-generating backing member, wherein the first outwardly expanding portion and the second outwardly expanding portion are , are arranged adjacent to each other in the plate thickness direction through the boundary portion, and the boundary portion is formed by intersecting the inner peripheral surfaces of the first outwardly spreading portion and the second outwardly spreading portion in a mountain shape. .

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, there exists an advantage which can prevent decline in productivity, safety, and durability of a protective cover.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine showing a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a side view of the gaming machine. It is a rear view of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the inner frame and the game board. It is a plan view of the gaming machine. It is a cross-sectional view of the game machine. It is a side view of the same inner frame, a back cover, etc. FIG. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the inner frame, the back cover, and the like. It is an exploded perspective view of the same front door. It is side surface sectional drawing, such as the 1st operation production|presentation means. It is front sectional drawing of the said 1st operation production|presentation means etc. It is plane sectional drawing, such as the 1st operation production|presentation means. It is a bottom view of the same operation button. It is explanatory drawing at the time of molding of the same operation button. It is sectional drawing of the same engaging means. It is sectional drawing of the fastening means. It is a front view of the same movable production means side. It is a front view of the same movable production means side. It is a cross-sectional view of the same main board case, effect board case, and the like. It is sectional drawing, such as the same main board|substrate case, a delivery board|substrate case. It is a perspective view of the same back cover. It is sectional drawing, such as a same-ball tank, a guide rail, and a back cover. It is sectional drawing, such as the same guide rail and a back cover. It is a top view, such as the same guide rail and a back cover. It is explanatory drawing at the time of opening the same back cover. It is a plan view of the gaming machine and the back cover when opened. It is sectional drawing, such as the same latch means. It is explanatory drawing at the time of opening and closing of the same back cover. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd hinge means side of the back cover. It is an exploded perspective view of the third hinge means. It is a plane sectional view of the same 3rd hinge means. It is a plane sectional view of the same 3rd hinge means. It is a plane sectional view of the same 3rd hinge means. It is an exploded perspective view of the third hinge means. It is a rear view of the same main board case. It is a rear view of the effect board case. It is a rear view of the same liquid crystal substrate case. It is a rear view of the same delivery board|substrate case. It is a back view of the connection state of the same board|substrate. It is a front view of the same back cover. It is a rear view of the upper part side of the back cover. It is a rear view of the lower part side of the back cover. It is a sectional view of the same back cover. It is a perspective view of the principal part of the same back cover. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of third hinge means showing a second embodiment of the present invention; It is a partially broken side view of the same 3rd hinge means. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the third hinge means. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of third hinge means showing a third embodiment of the present invention; It is a side view of the third hinge means. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the third hinge means. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of third hinge means showing a fourth embodiment of the present invention; It is an exploded perspective view of the third hinge means. It is a rear view of the third hinge means. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the third hinge means. It is a cross-sectional view of the third hinge means. It is a cross-sectional view of the third hinge means. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of third hinge means showing a fifth embodiment of the present invention; It is a cross-sectional view of the third hinge means. It is a rear view of the third hinge means. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the third hinge means. It is a cross-sectional view of the third hinge means. It is a rear view of the game machine showing the sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the game machine which shows the 7th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a gaming machine showing an eighth embodiment of the present invention; It is a plan view of the game machine in an open state. It is a rear surface view of the same back cover. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the back cover. It is a perspective view of the back side of the game machine showing the ninth embodiment of the present invention. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the inner frame, the back cover, and the like. It is a cross-sectional view of the game machine. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back cover, and (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the back cover. (a) to (f) are cross-sectional views of a back cover showing a tenth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a rear view of a back cover showing an eleventh embodiment of the present invention; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back cover, and (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the back cover. FIG. 22 is a rear view of a back cover showing a twelfth embodiment of the present invention; It is a cross-sectional view of the same back cover. It is a front view of a gaming machine showing a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a side view of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the same outer frame and inner frame. It is a perspective view of the same front door. It is an exploded perspective view of the same hinge means. It is an exploded perspective view of the same hinge means. It is an upper side sectional view of the same locking means. It is a middle part side sectional view of the same locking means. It is a lower side sectional view of the same locking means. It is a plane sectional view of the same locking means. It is a plane sectional view of the same locking means. It is a plane sectional view of the same locking means. It is a perspective view of the unlocking mechanism of the same locking means. It is a side view of the release mechanism of the same locking means. It is a rear view of the unlocking mechanism of the same locking means. It is a front cross-sectional view of the biasing means. It is a side cross-sectional view of the biasing means. It is sectional drawing of the same front door stop means periphery. It is a cross section around the same front door stopping means. It is sectional drawing of the same front door stop state. It is sectional drawing of the same front door stop state. (a) is a front view of the gaming machine, and (b) is a side view of the gaming machine. It is a schematic plan view of the gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing of the same locking means. 14A and 14B show a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention, wherein (a) is a sectional view around the front door stopping means, and (b) is a sectional view showing the state where the front door is stopped. It is a rear view of the gaming machine showing the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a plane sectional view of the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the same resin. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the back cover showing the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention; It is a plane sectional view of the same back cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the same resin. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the back cover showing the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention; It is a plane sectional view of the same back cover. It is sectional drawing which shows the flow state of the same resin. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the same resin. FIG. 32 is a rear view of a back cover showing an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention; It is a sectional view of the same back cover. It is a rear view of the game machine showing the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a cross-sectional view of the game machine. It is a sectional view of the same back cover. It is a perspective view of the same back cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the same resin. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the back cover showing the twentieth embodiment of the present invention; It is a top view of the same back cover. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the back cover. It is a perspective view of the same back cover. FIG. 30 is a rear view of the back cover showing the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention; It is a sectional view of the same back cover. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the back cover showing the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention; It is a sectional view of the same back cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the same resin. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a back cover showing a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention; It is a sectional view of the same back cover. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of a back cover showing a twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 30 is a rear view of the back cover showing the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention; It is a sectional view of the same back cover. It is explanatory drawing of the same board|substrate information display means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the same resin. FIG. 30 is a rear view of the back cover showing the twenty-sixth embodiment of the present invention; It is a sectional view of the same back cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow state of the same resin. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the back cover showing the twenty-seventh embodiment of the present invention; It is sectional drawing, such as the same back cover. It is a partially notched rear view of the substrate case. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the back cover showing the twenty-eighth embodiment of the present invention; It is a sectional view of the same back cover.

Embodiments of the invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 to 44 illustrate a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a game machine 1, which is a pachinko machine. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3 arranged in front of the outer frame 2. A front door 4 opens and closes in front of the inner frame 3. placed freely. The outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3 constitute gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 . The game machine main bodies 2 and 3 may be configured by other than the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3.

The inner frame 3 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 via first hinge means 6 so as to be openable and detachable. The inner frame 3 and the front door 4 can be locked with respect to the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3 respectively by means of locking means 8 on the opposite side of the hinge means 6 and 7 in a closed state.

The outer frame 2 includes a pair of left and right vertical frame members 9, an upper horizontal frame member 10 connecting the upper ends of the left and right vertical frame members 9 to the left and right, and connecting the lower ends of the left and right vertical frame members 9 to the left and right. It is formed in a rectangular shape by a lower horizontal frame member 11 and a decorative member 12 arranged in front of the lower horizontal frame member 11 and connecting the left and right vertical frame members 9 .

A game board mounting portion 13 and a rear protection portion 14 are integrally provided on the upper side of the inner frame 3, and a lower mounting portion 15 is integrally provided on the lower side of the game board mounting portion 13. - 特許庁A game board 16 is detachably attached to the game board mounting portion 13 from the front side. The back protection part 14 protects the back side mechanism 17 arranged on the back side of the game board 16 from the outer peripheral side, and is a pair of left and right side wall parts that are arranged in the vertical direction on both left and right sides and bent from the game board mounting part 13 to the back side. 18 and an upper wall portion 19 that bends backward from the game board mounting portion 13 and connects the upper sides of the left and right side wall portions 18 in the left-right direction.

Of the left and right side wall portions 18 of the back protection portion 14, the side wall portion 18a on the side opposite to the first hinge means 6 is rearward of the side wall portion 18b on the side of the first hinge means 6, as shown in FIGS. One end of the back cover 22 is attached to the mounting portion 20a on the rear end side via a plurality of third hinge means 21 in the vertical direction so as to be openable and detachable.

The side wall portion 18b of the back protection portion 14 on the side of the first hinge means 6 has a larger amount of rearward protrusion than the side wall portion 18a on the opposite side. A mounting portion 20b that bends toward the center is attached to the mounting portion 20b, and a dispensing means 23, which will be described later, is attached to the mounting portion 20b. It is detachably fixed.

In addition to the left and right side wall portions 18 of the back protection portion 14, the left and right side wall portions 18 and the upper wall portion 19 connecting the upper end sides thereof to the left and right have approximately the amount of protrusion (the amount of bending) toward the back side. may be the same. One latch means 24 may be arranged in the middle in the vertical direction, or three or more latch means 24 may be arranged on the outer circumference of the back cover 22 .

A shooting means 25 for shooting game balls one by one toward the game board 16 side is attached to the front side of the lower attachment portion 15, and a substrate is attached between the lower ends of the left and right side wall portions 18 of the rear protection portion 14. A platform 34 is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 16 is provided with an annular guide rail 27 for guiding the game ball shot by the shooting means 25 to the upper side of the game area 26 . In the central part of the game area 26, a liquid crystal display means (image display means) 28 and a center case 29 corresponding to the front side of the liquid crystal display means 28 are arranged. The center case 29 is detachably attached to the game board 16 from the front side, and the liquid crystal display means 28 is detachably attached to the game board 16 from the back side. Various game parts such as normal symbol starting means 30, special symbol starting means 31, variable winning means 32 and normal winning means 33 are arranged around a center case 29 in a game area 26 of the game board 16.例文帳に追加

The center case 29 is provided with a display window 29a corresponding to the display screen of the liquid crystal display means 28. On the front surface of the outer peripheral side of the display window 29a are the normal symbol display means 35, the special symbol display means 36, and the normal reserved number display means. 37, etc. are provided. The liquid crystal display means 28 constitutes a special reserved number display means 38, a performance symbol display means 39, a first operation guide display means 40, a second operation guide display means 41, and the like.

The normal symbol display means 35 is for displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner, and is composed of two light emitters (for example, LEDs) corresponding to two types of normal symbols, for example, "O" and "X". The two light emitters blink alternately for a predetermined time on condition that the normal symbol starting means 30 detects the game ball, and the hit determination random value obtained when the normal symbol starting means 30 detects the game ball is predetermined. In the state where the luminous body on the "○" side corresponding to the hit mode emits light when it matches the determined hit judgment value, and in the state in which the luminous body on the "x" side corresponding to the missing mode emits light in other cases, Blinking ends respectively.

The special symbol starting means 31 is for starting symbol variation by the special symbol display means 36, and is provided with upper starting winning means 31a and lower starting winning means 31b above and below. The upper start winning means 31a is non-openable. The lower starting winning means 31b is an opening/closing type switchable between a closed state in which a game ball cannot be entered (or difficult to enter) and an open state in which a game ball can be entered (or easy to enter), and is a normal symbol display means. When the stop symbol after the fluctuation of 35 becomes a win mode (ordinary profit mode) and a normal profit state occurs, the closed state is opened to the open state for a predetermined time.

The special symbol display means 36 is composed of display means such as a segment type that can variably display one or a plurality of special symbols, for example, three special symbols. A special pattern is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the condition that a game ball wins the winning means 31b, and a jackpot determination random number value (specific mode determination random number value) acquired when winning the starting winning means 31a, 31b is predetermined. If it matches the big hit judgment value (specific mode judgment value), the special pattern is in a predetermined jackpot mode (specific mode), and in other cases, it stops in an off mode (non-specific mode). there is

The normal reserved number display means 37, when the normal symbol starting means 30 detects the game ball during the variable display of the normal symbol display means 35 or during the normal profit state described later, the hit determination random value obtained at the time of the detection is Since it is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number of reserved numbers (for example, 4), the number of stored hit judgment random values (hereinafter referred to as normal reserved number) is displayed by the number of light emitting bodies that emit the same number as the upper limit number of reserved numbers. Then, the player is notified of the number of ordinary reservations at that time.

The production pattern display means 39 variably displays the production patterns 39a to 39c in parallel with the variable display of the special patterns by the special pattern display means 36, and one or more (for example, three in the left and right direction) production patterns. 39a to 39c can be variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display means 28 together with various effect images.

The performance symbols 39a to 39c of the performance symbol display means 39 are of a plurality of types of variation patterns at the same time as the special symbol variation starts when the game ball wins any of the starting winning means 31a and 31b of the special symbol starting means 31. It starts to fluctuate according to any of them, and after fluctuating for a predetermined time, it stops sequentially in the order of left, right, middle, etc., and finally stops at the same time as the fluctuation of the special symbol. The performance symbols 39a to 39c stop varying in the big winning performance mode when the special symbols stop in the big winning mode, and stop varying in the losing performance mode when the special symbols stop in the losing mode.

In the special reserved number display means 38, when a game ball wins in the special symbol starting means 31 during the variable display of special symbols or during the special profit state, the jackpot determination random number etc. obtained at the time of winning are each a predetermined upper limit. Since the number of reserved numbers (for example, 4 each) is stored as a limit, the number of stored jackpot judgment random numbers (hereinafter referred to as special reserved number) is displayed, and the special reserved number at that time is notified to the player. It has become.

The first operation guide display means 40 displays a first operation guide image 40a indicating that the effect is valid when the first operation effect becomes possible, and prompts the player to perform a first operation which will be described later. The operation of the production means 46 is prompted. The second operation guide display means 41 displays a second operation guide image 41a indicating that the effect is valid when the second operation effect becomes possible, and prompts the player to perform a second operation described later. The operation of the production means 47 is prompted.

In addition, each of the operation guide images 40a and 41a, when a predetermined operation effect condition is established, such as drawing a lottery pattern, etc., which has a high probability that the special symbol after the change will be a big win mode, the special symbol It is displayed timely from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation, and when the operation effect means 46 and 47 are operated while the operation guide images 40a and 41a are being displayed, the specific first operation guide image 40a is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 28. , by displaying the second operation guide image 41a, etc., to direct the appearance of a big win mode to the player.

The variable winning means 32 is of an opening/closing type provided with an opening/closing plate 32a capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. When a special profit state occurs in a predetermined jackpot mode, the opening/closing plate 32a is opened forward according to a predetermined opening pattern, and the game balls dropped thereon enter inside.

On the back side of the upper wall portion 19 of the inner frame 3, there are provided a ball tank 48 for storing game balls to be put out, a guide rail 49 for guiding the game balls in the ball tank 48, and an external connection terminal for taking out an external signal. A group 50 is arranged above the upper wall portion 19 of the back protection portion 14 .

The sphere tank 48 and the guide rail 49 are provided in the lateral direction close to the upper side of the upper wall portion 19 of the back protection portion 14 . is arranged to protrude rearward from the rear end of the upper wall portion 19 of the . The bottom surfaces of the ball tank 48 and the guide rail 49 are inclined so as not to hinder the flow of game balls.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the rear end of the sphere tank 48 is located forward of the rear end of the upper wall portion 19 of the rear protection portion 14, and the rear end of the guide rail 49 is located on the upper wall of the rear protection portion 14. As shown in FIGS. It projects rearward from the rear end of the portion 19 and overlaps the upper side of the back cover 22 . The external connection terminal group 50 has a large number of external connection terminals 50 a in the left-right direction, and is provided on the upper front side of the guide rail 49 .

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the side wall portion 18b of the back protection portion 14 on the side of the first hinge means 6 has a large amount of rearward protrusion, and the mounting portion 20b is bent inward in the left-right direction from the rear end. includes a payout means 23 for putting out game balls, a ball supply passage 51 for supplying game balls from the guide rail 49 to the payout means 23, and a game ball put out from the payout means 23 to an upper tray 52 which will be described later. A ball guide passage 54 for guiding the ball is vertically arranged in a row.

The front door 4 has a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the inner frame 3, and is provided with a viewing window 53 through which the game area 26 can be viewed on the upper side. As shown in FIG. 10, the front door 4 includes a rectangular door frame 55, and a lower unit 56, a first upper unit 57 and a second upper unit 58 mounted on the front surface of the door frame 55. there is The lower unit 56 is arranged in front of the door frame 55 below the viewing window 53 , and the first upper unit 57 is arranged vertically on the first hinge means 6 side of the viewing window 53 . The second upper unit 58 straddles the horizontal direction above the viewing window 53 and the vertical direction on the side opposite to the first hinge means 6 of the viewing window 53, and is arranged in front of the door frame 55 in an L shape when viewed from the front. It is arranged detachably. An upper speaker 59 and a lower speaker 60 are provided on the front door 4 so as to correspond to the upper, lower, left and right sides of the viewing window 53 .

While the lower unit 56 and the first upper unit 57 are substantially common to a plurality of models of the gaming machine 1, the second upper unit 58 is unique to the model, and this unique second upper unit By combining the unit 58 with the common lower unit 56 and the first upper unit 57, the front side of the game machine 1 of the relevant model is configured.

Therefore, if there are a plurality of types of second upper units 58, by appropriately selecting and mounting one of the second upper units 58, the outer frame 2, the inner frame 3, the door frame 55, etc. can be used in common. , different types of game machines 1 can be easily manufactured. Note that the first upper unit 57 may be replaceable.

The viewing window 53 is closed by a glass unit (not shown) detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 55 . The glass unit includes front and rear two glass plates that can see through the game area 26 and a holding frame that holds the outside of the front and rear two glass plates, and is detachably fixed to the back side of the front door 4. .

The lower unit 56 has a generally triangular shape in plan view, with the left and right central portions protruding forward. An upper plate 52 for storing balls, a lower plate (surplus ball storing portion) 61 for storing surplus balls, and a lower cover 62 for covering the outer peripheral side of these are provided. A firing handle 63 for firing operation is provided on the side opposite to the plate 52 and the lower plate 61 .

The first operation effect means 46 is operated when executing the first operation effect, and as shown in FIGS. , a rotating light emitting means 67 provided inside the operation button 64, a first detection switch 65 such as a proximity type capable of detecting the operation of the operation button 64, and a vibration means 66 for vibrating the operation button 64. , are arranged in the vertical direction at the center of the front side of the lower unit 56 .

When the first operation guide image 40a is displayed on the first operation guide display unit 40, the first operation effect means 46 is operated by the player pressing the operation button 64 while the first operation guide image 40a is being displayed. It is possible. When the operation button 64 is pressed to turn on the first detection switch 65, the liquid crystal display means 28 displays a first operation effect image (not shown) or the like to execute a predetermined first operation effect. , to arouse the player's interest in the game.

The operation button 64 constitutes an operation cover body that covers the rotary light emitting means 67 inside, and is made of transparent or translucent resin. It integrally has a spherical operation portion (operation top portion) 70 which is concentrically cylindrically formed via a portion 69 , and a body portion 68 is fixed to a lift plate 71 on the lower side. The elevating plate 71 is provided on a fixed base 72 so as to be movable up and down via a guide rod 76 and is biased upward by a spring 77 such as a coil spring fitted on the guide rod 76 .

The fixing base 72 is mounted on a fixing member 78 projecting forward from the door frame 55 inside the front door 4 . An operation portion 70 of the operation button 64 projects upward from the lower cover 62 , and the rear portion of the operation portion 70 is covered with a rear cover 79 on the lower cover 62 side. The lower cover 62 is provided with a U-shaped notch 80 on the front side of the body 68, and the notch 80 is provided with a transparent resin front cover 81 that covers the body 68 from the front. ing.

The rotary light emitting means 67 is provided within the operation button 64, and during the operation possible period from when the operation button 64 becomes operable until the player operates the operation button 64, the first light after the operation button 64 is operated. At a required time, such as during operation performance, the rotating light emitting means 67 rotates and emits light to illuminate the operation button 64 from the inside.

The rotating light emitting means 67 has a fixed LED board 83 having a plurality of LEDs 82 mounted on its upper surface, and a transparent part 84a and a red part 84b in the direction of rotation, and is rotatably provided around the outer circumference of the LED board 83. When the LED 82 emits light, the spherical body 84 rotates, and in synchronization with the rotation of the spherical body 84, the operation button 64 changes from the inside to the white color through the transparent portion 84a and the red portion 84b. It emits light alternately with red. The transparent portion 84a and the red portion 84b are irregularly reflective to make it difficult to see the inside.

The spherical body 84 is rotatably supported by a support portion 86 on the fixed base 72 via cylindrical rotating shafts 85 arranged on both left and right sides, and is driven by a rotation driving motor 87 to rotate the rotating shaft via a gear train 88 and the like. Rotate around 85. The LED board 83 is fixed to the support portion 86 of the fixed base 72 via a fixed shaft 89 inserted through the left and right rotating shafts 85 .

A body portion 68 of the operation button 64 is provided with an inverted U-shaped notch portion 68a for inserting the rotating shaft 85 upward from the lower end toward the operation portion 70 side. Therefore, even when the operation button 64 is pressed downward, the rotating light emitting means 67 does not move up and down. The lower cover 62 and the rear cover 79 are made of light-blocking resin. The operation portion 70 and body portion 68 of the operation button 64 and the front cover 81 are light transmissive, and the rotating light emitting means 67 can be seen through from the front side.

As shown in FIG. 14, the operation button 64 has a trace 90 of a resin pouring portion at the time of molding on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the body portion 68, and the lower end surface of the body portion 68 and the lower surface of the stepped portion 69 are molded. There are traces 91a and 91b of the extruded parts of time. The resin pouring portion trace 90 is the trace of the resin pouring portion where the molten resin was poured into the cavity from the resin pouring portion on the mold side during molding, and is substantially central in the vertical direction of the body portion 68 on the rear side of the body portion 68 . , and other intermediate positions.

Here, the "resin pouring part" will be briefly described. In addition, although the name "resin pouring part" often appears in the explanation so far and the explanation after this, the name "gate", which is universally used among those skilled in the art, is used instead of this. may be used (replaced). In addition, the runner system (cold runner, hot runner) differs depending on the type of mold (2-plate mold, 3-plate mold). The name may be further subdivided as follows.

(1) Direct gate (2 plate mold)
Advantages include "small pressure loss due to gate", "simple structure, low cost, and hard to break". On the other hand, there are disadvantages such as "necessary to cut gates in the post-process", "large gate cut traces", "cannot produce multiple pieces", and "cannot increase the number of points".

(2) Side gate (2 plate mold)
Advantages include "relatively low pressure loss due to the gate" and "simple structure, low cost, and hard to break". On the other hand, as disadvantages, "gate cut is required in the post-process" and "gate marks remain".

(3) Submarine gate (2 plate mold)
An advantage is that "gate cutting is not required in the post-process". On the other hand, its disadvantages are that it can only be installed on the side, and that the trace of the gate is not convex but dirty.

(4) Pin gate (3 plate mold)
Advantages include "no need to cut gates in post-process", "small and inconspicuous gate traces", "easily multi-point/multiple-piece production", and "easy to obtain uniform pressure distribution". On the other hand, it has disadvantages such as "the amount of material used is large due to the long runner", "the size of the mold is large", and "the structure is complicated and expensive".

The extruded portion traces 91a and 91b are traces of the extruded portion such as an ejector pin contacting the molded product at the time of demolding. Multiple are placed. The extrusion trace 91b on the lower surface of the stepped portion 69 is circular, and the extrusion trace 91a on the lower end surface of the body portion 68 is semicircular, which is smaller than the extrusion trace 91b on the stepped portion 69 side. Accordingly, two types of extruding portions having different sizes are used according to the conditions of each extruding position of the operation button 64 during molding.

Here, the "extrusion trace" will be briefly described. In the explanations up to this point and the following explanation, the term "ejection trace" often appears. The name "Ejector) pin trace" may be used (replaced). Also, in this case, what corresponds to the "extrusion means" is the "ejection pin (ejection pin is synonymous), ejector pin".

When resin is molded for the operation button 64, as shown in FIG. 15, the resin is melted from the resin pouring portion corresponding to the resin pouring portion mark 90 into the cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold in the direction of the arrow 90a. The resin is poured into it and molded into a predetermined operation button shape. A resin pouring portion mark 90 is located in the substantially central portion of the body portion 68 in the vertical direction, and the molten resin is poured radially (in the direction indicated by the arrow 90a) from the resin pouring portion corresponding to the resin pouring portion mark 90. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to pour the molten resin substantially uniformly into the entire cavity at the time of molding, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of weld lines due to the merging of the molten resin.

Here, the "weld line" will be briefly explained. If a pin or core is provided to form a hollow part in a molded product, the resin will split at that part, and a thin wire ( line) occurs. This "thin line generated at the part where the flow of molten resin joins and fuses in the mold in resin molding" is the weld line, but it is sometimes written as weld line, weld line, etc.

The term "weld line" has often appeared in the explanations up to this point and in the explanations that follow. It may also be expressed as a confluence line, a resin confluence line, or the like. The process until the weld line is formed is shown below.

As shown in FIG. 15, the molten resin poured from the resin pouring portion in the radial direction indicated by the arrow 90a flows in the lateral direction (90b arrow direction, 90c arrow direction) in the entire cavity on the back side of the body portion 68 from the resin pouring portion. direction) and up and down directions (direction of arrow 90d, direction of arrow 90e). For example, the molten resin flows from the resin pouring portion in the cavity of the body portion 68 in the left-right direction (directions indicated by arrows 90b and 90c), and also flows in the cavity of the body portion 68 from the resin pouring portion in the vertical direction (arrow 90d). 90e arrow direction).

However, if the molten resin flowing in the left-right direction (the direction indicated by the arrow 90b and the direction indicated by the arrow 90c) reaches the left and right cutouts (flow obstruction) 68a on the front side, the cutouts 68a allow the molten resin to flow forward. Since the flow is impeded, the molten resin will not flow from the left and right sides to the front side of the body portion 68 beyond the notch portion 68a. On the other hand, the molten resin flowing upward (in the direction indicated by the arrow 90d) is in communication with the front side of the trunk portion 68 through the top portion of the operation portion 70 between the left and right notch portions 68a of the cavity. It flows to the front side of the trunk portion 68 via the top portion side of the operation portion 70 between the left and right cutout portions 68a.

After the molten resin in the cavity hardens, the mold is opened, and the molded product is extruded by the extruder on the movable mold side and removed from the movable mold. A plurality of extrusion traces 91a and 91b are arranged in the circumferential direction on the lower end surface of the body portion 68 and the lower surface of the stepped portion 69 of the operation button 64. , the molded product of the operation button 64 can be easily removed from the movable mold.

After that, a predetermined operation button 64 can be obtained by cutting off the runner or the like with a tool. In addition, recessed extruded portion traces 91a and 91b are left on the lower end surface of the body portion 68 and the lower surface of the stepped portion 69. As shown in FIG.

By injection-molding the operation button 64 in this manner, the melted resins separated from each other do not join together in the cavity for the operation button 64, and the occurrence of weld lines can be prevented. Therefore, the strength of the operation button 64 is improved, and even if the player frequently hits or presses the operation button 64 during the game, it is possible to secure enough strength to withstand the impact.

Moreover, although the resin pouring portion mark 90 having a shape corresponding to the resin pouring portion remains, the resin pouring portion mark 90 is only in one place and is located at the rear portion of the body portion 68, so that the weld line is not generated. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 64 is improved. Furthermore, recessed extrusion traces 91a and 91b remain on the lower end surface of the body portion 68 and the lower surface of the stepped portion 69, but depending on the shape and structure of the operation button 64, the extrusion trace 91b on the side of the stepped portion 69 is large. , and since the push-out trace 91a on the lower end side of the body portion 68 is small, the push-out portion can be arranged in accordance with the portion of the operation button 64 .

The first upper unit 57 includes a front side cover 93 that is elongated in the vertical direction, and an LED type light emitting means (not shown) arranged on the back side of the side cover 93. A predetermined portion of the side cover 93 emits light by the light from the means.

As shown in FIG. 10 , the second upper unit 58 includes a reinforcing frame 94 made of sheet metal and formed in an L shape in front view, extending from the upper side to the right side of the viewing window 53 . A lateral body portion 95 attached to the front surface of the frame 94, a vertical body portion 96 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing frame 94 on the right side of the viewing window 53, and a central portion of the horizontal body portion 95. A movable effect means 97 arranged movably in the direction, and a second operation effect means 47 arranged in the vertical center of the vertical body part 96, and mounting means such as an engaging means 98 and a fastening means 99 It is detachably attached to the front surface of the door frame 55 via the .

The second upper unit 58 is detachably attached to the front side of the door frame 55 of the front door 4 via engaging means 98 and fastening means 99 . The engaging means 98 and the fastening means 99 are arranged dispersedly at a plurality of locations including both end portions of the L-shaped reinforcing frame 94 and the intermediate portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 16, each engaging means 98 has an engaging hook 100 protruding from the reinforcing frame 94 to the rear side. It is detachably engaged with the engaged portion 102 from above. One of the plurality of engaging means 98 is provided with a clamping means 103 for fastening the engaging means 98 in an engaged state so that it cannot be detached.

The clamping means 103 includes a clamping lever 106 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 104 of the door frame 55 by a pivot 105, and a connecting shaft 107 connected to the middle of the clamping lever 106 and engaging the engaging hook 100 from above. and a clamping tool 108 provided to be releasably engageable. With the clamping tool 108 engaged with the engaging hook 100, the clamp lever 106 is rotated downward around the pivot 105, When the clamp lever 106 is rotated around the pivot 105 until the connecting shaft 107 crosses the extension line connecting the engaging position of the clamp tool 108 with the engaging hook 100 and the pivot 105 to the door frame 55 side, the engaging means 98 is non-releasably tightened. The clamping means 103 releases the clamping of the engaging means 98 when the clamping lever 106 is rotated about the pivot 105 in the opposite direction.

As shown in FIG. 17, the fastening means 99 includes a fastening screw 110 inserted through the door frame 55 from an attachment portion 113 on the back side of the door frame 55. is screwed into the screw hole 112 on the reinforcing frame 94 side, the fastening screw 110 tightens the reinforcing frame 94 to the door frame 55 side. A door plate made of resin is attached to the front surface of the door frame 55 .

When attaching the second upper unit 58 to the door frame 55 , first, the second upper unit 58 is arranged on the front side of the door frame 55 , and the engaging hooks 100 of the respective engaging means 98 are engaged with the door frame 55 . engages portion 102; Next, the clamping means 103 corresponding to any of the engaging means 98 on the back side of the door frame 55 clamps the engaging hook 100 to tighten the engaging means 98 so that the engaging means 98 cannot be detached. Finally, the fastening screws 110 of the fastening means 99 are operated from the back side of the door frame 55 to fasten the reinforcing frame 94 of the second upper unit 58 to the door frame 55 side. When removing the second upper unit 58, the procedure is reversed.

The horizontal main body portion 95 and the vertical main body portion 96 are provided so as to protrude forward from the reinforcing frame 94, and light emitting means such as an LED type is incorporated therein.

The movable effect means 97 includes a movable effect body 114 which is configured to imitate the head and forewings of a "butterfly" and which is arranged facing forward, and which supports the movable effect body 114 from the back side and moves the movable effect body 114 to the origin. It is provided with effect driving means 115 that drives to be movable in the front-rear direction between the position 114A and the forward position 114B, and vibration means (not shown) that vibrates the movable effect body 114. FIG.

The movable effect means 97 normally has the movable effect body 114 at the origin position 114A, and during the second operation effect, the movable effect body 114 moves forward once or more between the origin position 114A and the forward position 114B. Any one of a plurality of presentation actions including a movement presentation action to retreat and a vibration presentation action in which the movable presentation body 114 vibrates back and forth at the origin position 114A and/or the forward position 114B is selectively performed. ing. Note that the movable effect body 114 may be stopped at the forward position 114B for a predetermined period of time and then returned to the origin position 114A.

The movable effect means 97 has a projecting position 114C projecting upward from the upper surface of the horizontal body portion 95 as shown in FIG. It is rotatable around a rotation axis (not shown) in the front-rear direction between the . It should be noted that the movable effect means 97 can be locked at each of the projecting position 114C and the retracted position 114D by locking means (not shown).

By providing the movable effect means 97 so that the posture can be changed between the projecting position 114C and the retracted position 114D, when the game machine 1 is housed in the packing case and packed, the movable effect means 97 can be moved to the retracted position. 114D can be compactly stored, and after being installed in the island facility of the game hall, it is possible to use the movable effect means 97 in a state of protruding to the protruding position 114C.

The second operation effect means 47 is operated when executing the second operation effect, and as shown in FIGS. An operating portion 118 that can be pressed, an operating portion driving means 119 that supports the operating portion 118 from the back side and drives the operating portion 118 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction between an origin position 118A and a forward position 118B, and an origin. and a second detection switch (not shown) for detecting the pressing operation of the operation portion 118 at the position 118A. The operation portion driving means 119 has a predetermined play that allows the operation portion 118 on the side of the origin position 118A to be pushed backward, and the operation portion 118 is moved forward toward the origin position 118A by the biasing means within the range of the play. energized.

The second operation rendering means 47 performs two operations: a movement operation in which the operation unit 118 moves back and forth between the origin position 118A and the forward position 118B, and a pressing operation in which the operation unit 118 is pressed on the origin position 118A side. For example, when the second operation guide image 41a is displayed on the second operation guide display means 41, the player operates the second operation effect means 47 during the display period of the second operation guide image 41a. When the part 118 is pressed, the movable production means 97 performs a production action in which the movable production means 97 moves back and forth between the origin position 118A and the forward position 118B, and a second operation production is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 28 in synchronization with the movable production. A predetermined second operation effect is executed by displaying an image (not shown) or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 10, the front door 4 is provided with first to fifth warning display means 120 to 124 at required locations. The first warning display means 120 displays precautions regarding the assembly of the movable effect means 97 to the game machine installer. is provided in The second warning display means 121 directly or indirectly displays cautions regarding the assembly of the second upper unit 58 to the game machine installer. located on the upper side.

The third attention-calling display means 122 directly or indirectly displays cautions concerning the operation of the movable effect means 97 to the player. It is provided in the vicinity of the lower side of 97. The fourth attention-calling display means 123 directly or indirectly displays cautions concerning the operation of the second operation effect means 47 to the player, and is provided in the vicinity of the lower side of the second operation effect means 47. . The fifth warning display means 124 directly or indirectly displays cautions regarding the operation of the first operation effect means 46 to the player. located nearby.

The first attention calling display means 120 relates to the assembly work of assembling the movable effect body 114 of the movable effect means 97 in a projecting state, and when there are a plurality of work processes, except for some cautions related to less important work, Attention is displayed by displaying precautions for important work processes. For example, when the gaming machine 1 is installed on the island facility, after the packaging of the gaming machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the movable effect body 114 is unlocked by the lock means at the storage position 114D, and the movable effect body 114 is removed. Each assembling work is required to rotate around the front-rear axis from the storage position 114D to the projecting position 114C, and to lock the movable effect body 114 at the projecting position 114C so that it cannot be rotated again by the locking means.

Therefore, the first attention-calling display means 120 provides the following information: "1. Release the lock of the movable effect body at the retracted position. 2. Rotate the movable effect body to the projecting position. 3. Lock the movable effect body at the projecting position." As in, when it is necessary to set the movable effect body 114 to the projecting position 114C through a plurality of work processes, the movable effect body 114 is displayed to alert the operator to the important work to be noted for safe setting.

By clearly displaying the important assembling work steps when assembling the movable effect body 114 in the projecting state by the first attention calling display means 120 arranged near the movable effect means 97 in this way, the operator can When assembling the movable effect body 114, it is possible to easily grasp which work process should be paid attention to, and by proceeding with the work along the precautions of the first attention calling display means 120, safety Moreover, the movable effect body 114 can be efficiently set in the projecting state.

Further, the first attention-calling display means 120 displays cautions regarding important work for safely setting the movable effect body 114, except for cautions regarding less important work such as obvious work processes. Therefore, essential precautions can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner in the limited display area of the first attention-calling display means 120, compared to the case where all matters are covered in detail. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of operator's work mistakes as much as possible. Moreover, since it is not necessary to increase the size of the first alerting display means 120, the beauty of the game machine 1 as a whole is not spoiled.

Moreover, the movable effect body 114 is provided in the second upper unit 58, and since the second upper unit 58 is detachable from the door frame 55, the first warning display means 120 is also the movable effect body 114. Similarly, by being provided in the second upper unit 58, even when the second upper unit 58 is removed from the window frame, the movable effect body 114 and the first attention calling display means 120 are not separated, and the first There is an advantage that the display regarding the movable effect body 114 of the alerting display means 120 can be easily confirmed at any time, and the management becomes easy.

The second warning display means 121 displays precautions regarding the mounting work when mounting the second upper unit 58 to the door frame 55 . When attaching the second upper unit 58 to the door frame 55 , the second upper unit 58 is arranged on the front side of the door frame 55 and the engaging hooks 100 of the respective engaging means 98 are engaged with the door frame 55 . After engaging with the portion 102, the clamping means 103 corresponding to any of the engaging means 98 on the back side of the door frame 55 clamps the engaging hook 100 to unremovably tighten the engaging means 98, and finally The fastening screw 110 of the fastening means 99 is operated from the back side of the door frame 55 to fasten the reinforcing plate of the second upper unit 58 to the door frame 55 side.

Therefore, the second warning display means 121 provides the following information: 1. Engage the engaging means with the door frame. 2. Clamp the engaging means with the clamping means. When it is necessary to attach the second upper unit 58 to the front side of the door frame 55 through a plurality of work processes such as ". Except for , important precautions that should be noted for safe mounting of the second upper unit 58 are displayed to call attention to the operator by the displayed matter. Therefore, an effect similar to that of the first warning display means 120 can be obtained.

The third warning display means 122 is provided in the vicinity of the lower side of the movable effect means 97 on the front side surface of the horizontal body portion 95 of the second upper unit 58 . Since the movable effect body 114 of the movable effect means 97 moves back and forth between the origin position 114A and the forward position 114B, when the player stands up during the game when the movable effect body 114 is positioned at the forward position 114B, the player moves forward. There is a risk of hitting the head with the movable effect body 114 at the position 114B. Therefore, the third warning display means 122 displays warnings such as "Caution above the head!" The display is designed to attract the player's attention.

The fourth warning display means 123 is provided near the lower side of the second operation effect means 47 on the front side surface of the vertical body portion 96 of the second upper unit 58 . Since the operation part 118 of the second operation effect means 47 moves back and forth between the origin position 118A and the forward position 118B, when the operation part 118 is operated, the finger is placed between the front surface of the vertical body part 96. There is a danger of getting caught. Therefore, on the fourth warning display means 123, along with a warning display such as "Beware of getting your fingers caught!" Affixed nearby.

In addition, when there is a possibility that the player's body, arms, or the like may come into contact with the operation portion 118 when the operation portion 118 of the second operation presentation means 47 is positioned at the forward position 118B, the fourth warning display means is displayed. 123 may display different notices. Different notices regarding the operation unit 118 may be displayed either singly or separately.

The fifth warning display means 124 is provided on the lower cover 62 in the vicinity of the first operation effect means 46 . For example, the first operation rendering means 46 performs three operations: a first upward/downward motion by pressing the operation button 64, a second rotating light emitting operation by the rotating light emitting means 67, and a third vibrating motion by the vibrating means 66. It is possible. In such a case, the fifth warning display means 124 directly or indirectly displays cautions regarding the action of the first operation effect means 46 to call the player's attention. The second action and the third action, which are less alert to the player, are not displayed, and the first action, which is more alert to the player, is displayed.

When the first operation rendering means 46 performs a plurality of actions of the first to third actions, if all the attention-calling information for each action is displayed on the fifth attention-calling display means 124, attention can be given by displaying the attention-calling information. The effectiveness of the stimulating effect is rather reduced. That is, even if the fifth warning display means 124 is provided on the front lower cover 62 of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3, there is also a space limitation in its arrangement area, and an unlimitedly large area cannot be secured. Therefore, if all of the attention calling information for each action of the first operation effect means 46 that performs the first to third actions is displayed, the display of each attention calling information becomes too small, making it difficult for the player to check it. The effect of calling attention by displaying information is rather reduced. However, by displaying the attention calling information of the first action with a high degree of attention calling to the player by the fifth attention calling display means 124, the player can accurately grasp the attention calling information.

The degree of alerting the player may be determined by the amount of movement of the operation button 64 for the first to third actions. For example, the first movement of the up-and-down movement involves a large amount of movement of the operation button 64, the second movement of the rotating light emission movement does not move the operation button 64, and the third movement of the vibration movement by the vibrating means 66 is the movement of the operation button 64. When the amount of movement of is small, the fifth attention-calling display means 124 displays the attention-calling information regarding the first action in which the movement amount of the operation button 64 is large, as described above.

The operation button 64 of the first operation presentation means 46 is made of resin and may be damaged if a large impact force is applied. Along with the warning display, cautions regarding damage to the operation button 64 may be displayed using characters, drawings, or the like. In this case, it can be said that the caution regarding the breakage of the operation button 64 is alerting information with a high degree of alerting the player.

In addition, in the movable effect means 97 as well, a first action in which the movable effect body 114 moves between the origin position 114A and the forward position 114B and a second action in which the movable effect body 114 vibrates at the origin position 114A and/or the forward position 114B are performed. Since two actions of two actions are performed, when the attention calling information is displayed by the third attention calling display means 122, attention is given to the first action having a large amount of movement without displaying the second action having a small amount of movement. You may make it display awakening information.

A similar configuration may be used when the fourth attention-calling display means 123 displays attention-calling information regarding the second operation effect means 47 .

Note that the warning display means 120 to 124 are generally configured by a display sheet on which precautions are printed, and the display sheet is attached to a predetermined place by adhesion, adhesion, or the like. A warning display or other warning information may be displayed by printing, engraving, or the like. Further, the attention-calling information displayed on the third to fifth attention-calling display means 122-124 may be anything as long as it calls attention to safety precautions and characteristic matters in terms of the operation or operation of the target location. .

Disclosure of attention-calling information to players or game machine installers will now be described.

<1. Attention to Players>

<1-1> When the same movable body has multiple actions For example, in the movable effect means 97, the action of the movable effect body 114 popping out in the front direction (first action) and the front surface of the movable effect body 114 Consider a case where there are two light emitting operations (second operation) in which the light emitting unit on the side emits light. A potential risk of the first action of the movable effect body 114 is that a player who does not know the existence of the first action puts a small item such as a wallet or a cigarette on the movable effect body 114 or places it above the gaming machine. When performing an action such as reaching out to see the data display on the side of the island facility, it is conceivable that a small object may fall from the movable effect body 114 or the hand may hit the movable effect body 114. .

In addition, as a potential risk of the second action of the light-emitting unit, if a player who does not know the existence of the second action is staring at the light-emitting unit of the movable effect means 97, the light emission may be intense. Risk of injury. However, it is widely known to players that a predetermined portion of a game machine emits light, and it can be said that it is within the range of assumption to some extent that the movable effect means 97 emits light.

Therefore, when calling attention to the rendering operation of the movable rendering means 97, "movable (at least part of the position changes)" and "luminous (at least part of the color changes, or changes from the off state to the lit state). , or change from a low-brightness light-emitting state to a high-brightness light-emitting state)”, it can be said that the potential risk is greater if the “movability” is not known, so the first warning display means 120 is used to call attention. The priority (“attention level”) of “movable” is higher than that of “light emission”.

Therefore, the first attention-calling display means 120 mainly displays, in a large size, at least the caution regarding the first action "movable", which has a high priority, and omits the caution regarding the second action "light emission", which has a low priority. or displayed in a smaller size.

<1-2> When there are multiple movable objects that perform the same type of action As shown in 1-1, it can be said that "movable" has a higher potential risk than "light emission", but the same type of action Even if it is (light emitting, movable), there may be a difference or a difference in the amount of operation (degree of operation).

For example, even when the operation type is "light emission", the former puts a greater strain on the eyes and the higher the light emission state. There is a big difference in the burden on the player between the case of high-speed blinking of brightness and the case of lighting (non-blinking) or slow-blinking of low brightness (gradation light emission).

Furthermore, even when the type of motion is "movable," the risk of hitting a hand or head is greater in the case of a large amount of motion (e.g., moving 20 cm) than in the case of a small amount of motion (e.g., moving 5 cm). In addition, when the movable body jumps out and when the movable body vibrates, the former increases the risk of hitting the hand or head.

Therefore, even when the player is alerted by the attention alerting display means, if the same movable body has a plurality of motion modes in the same type of motion, the motion modes that place a heavy burden on the eyes, or , a motion mode in which there is a high risk of hitting the hand or the head (thus causing injury) has a higher priority in calling attention than other motion modes. Therefore, when the attention is called by the attention calling display means, the attention of the action mode with the higher priority is preferentially displayed, and the action mode with the lower priority is omitted or secondarily displayed smaller.

<1-3> When there are multiple movable bodies that perform the same type of motion In 1-2, the case where one movable body has multiple motion modes of the same type was described, but here, the same type of motion is performed. A case where there are a plurality of movable bodies (or effect bodies) will be described.

For example, if the action type is "light emission", two or more movable objects may perform approximately the same light emission action (high-speed blinking, high-intensity lighting, change from light-off state to light-emitting state, etc.). A movable body that is close to the player's line of sight (for example, a movable body that is provided on the front side of the game machine frame like the second operation effect means 47) and a movable body that is far from the player's line of sight (for example, , a movable body provided in the upper part of the game machine frame like the movable effect means 97, or a movable body provided in the lower part of the game machine frame like the first operation effect means 46), the former is more eye-catching. a heavy burden on

Further, when the action type is "movable", two or more movable bodies may perform approximately the same movable action (movement, rotation, vibration). Effect means 47) and a movable object that moves in the vertical direction (for example, first operation effect means 46), the former has a higher risk of hitting the head (comparison when neither movement is recognized). . Similarly, for rotation and vibration, the size of the movable body itself and the relationship with the structure around the movable body (whether it is flat or uneven, etc.) affect the risk of pinching hands or hitting the head. It is possible to define

Therefore, even if the same type of action is performed by a plurality of movable bodies, the action that places a greater burden on the player is given a higher priority when calling attention by the attention calling display means. Therefore, a performance operation with a high priority is preferentially displayed, and a performance operation with a low priority is omitted or displayed secondarily.

<2. Alert for Game Machine Installers>
The degree of alerting to the gaming machine installer is different from that to the players described above. When the gaming machine is installed, the power is naturally turned off, and the above-described operations such as "light emission" and "movability" are not performed. Although the power may be turned on to check the operation after installation, the explanation here assumes that the power is not turned on.

<When assembling the members of 2-1.1>
In principle, when assembling one member to a game machine frame, etc., it is not necessary to call attention to the assembly order, and to call attention to injury during work by the game machine installer, such as "Beware of getting your fingers caught!" has priority.

Note that even when assembling a single member, when assembling through multiple steps, such as moving up (or down) and then moving left (or right) from that position and fixing, be careful about the order of assembly. Priority may be given to safety precautions, and precautions against injury during work may be secondary.

<2-2.2 When assembling the above members in a predetermined order>
When two or more members are to be assembled in a predetermined order with respect to a game machine frame, conversely, the priority of a warning such as "Beware of getting your fingers caught" is lowered, and each member is displayed as "Beware of assembly order!" The priority of calling attention to assembly order is increased. Therefore, cautions regarding the assembly order are displayed preferentially, and cautions such as "Beware of pinching fingers" are displayed secondarily.

<3. Attention Calling Display Means for Player and Attention Calling Display Means for Game Machine Installer>

<3-1. Difference in number of warning display means>
The number of attention calling display means for players is made larger than the number of attention calling display means for game machine installers. The reason for this is that game machine installers describe points of caution in the "instruction manual", so the attention-calling display means placed on the game machine is kept to the minimum necessary, but for players This is because the number of display means for calling attention is increased because there is no place to call attention except on the game machine. Another reason is that only one type of attention (one action) is performed for each attention-calling display means in order to make each attention-calling display means small so as not to impair the beauty as much as possible. It's also for.

<3-2. Difference in position of alert display means>
The display means for calling attention to the player is arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the display means for calling attention to the operator of the gaming machine is arranged on the sides (upper, right, left, etc.) of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the display means for calling attention to the game machine installer may be displayed at a position that can be visually recognized only when the door is opened.

<3-3. Difference in Size of Alert Display Means>
The attention calling display means for the player has the attention calling power but does not impair the appearance, and the attention calling display means for the game machine installer emphasizes the attention calling power rather than the beauty. In addition, since the attention-calling display means for the game machine installer is located at a position that is invisible (or difficult to see) from the player, one attention-calling display means may display a plurality of different attention-calling objects. An alert item may be displayed, or a plurality of alert items may be displayed for one alert target. For example, a display of "Caution about finger pinching" and a display of "Caution about assembly order" may be displayed by one printed matter or the like as a warning display means.

<3-4. Differences in display method of alert display>
The display means for calling attention to the player is located at a position where the player can see it. For example, if the display is made with an easily peelable sticker or the like, there is a risk that the display will be peeled off intentionally or accidentally. Therefore, various countermeasures are conceivable, such as adopting a seal with higher adhesive strength, coating the surface so that it cannot be touched by hand, and so on.

On the other hand, the warning display means for the game machine installer is basically seen only by the game machine installer, and the work of reassembling after installation does not occur so frequently, so at least negligence There is a low possibility that it will come off. Therefore, the effect of cost reduction can be expected by adopting a general sticker or the like that is not so sticky as compared with the display means for alerting the player.

In addition, as other countermeasures, the surroundings of the attention calling display means for the player may be covered with a convex portion (all four sides may not be covered), or the attention calling display area of the attention calling display means may be recessed by one step from the surroundings. It is also conceivable to take measures against peeling, such as by In this case as well, the effect of cost reduction can be expected by differentiating the attention-calling target according to the attention-calling target, such as not applying the same countermeasure to the attention-calling display for the game machine installer.

In addition, as described above, the countermeasure method may be divided depending on the person to be alerted, or the countermeasure method may be divided depending on the content of the alert (for example, measures are taken for the alerting display means for movement, and the alerting for light emission is performed. measures are not applied to the display means), and the countermeasures are divided according to the place of attention (for example, countermeasures are applied to the caution display means displayed in the frame, and countermeasures are applied to the caution display means displayed on the board). not, etc.).

The front door 4 consists of a glass door on the upper side equipped with a viewing window 53 and a glass unit, etc., and an open/close door on the lower side equipped with operation rendering means, an upper tray 52, a lower tray 61, a firing handle 63, etc. It is also possible to divide the glass door and the opening/closing door into two parts so that they can be opened and closed separately around the second hinge means 7 on substantially the same axis.

On the back side of the game board 16, as shown in FIG. 9, a back mounting base 127 and a ball collecting case 128 are mounted vertically. On the back mounting base 127, a liquid crystal display means 28 arranged to face the rear of the display window 29a of the center case 29, and a movable effect means (not shown) arranged between the game board 16 and the liquid crystal display means 28 are arranged. ) are attached. In addition, the back mounting base 127 has a cover portion 127a on the lower side, and by the cover portion 127a, the special symbol starting means 31, the variable winning means 32, the normal winning means 33, etc. project from the game board 16 to the back side. (illustration omitted) is covered from the back side.

The liquid crystal display means 28 is housed in a protective case 129 and detachably fixed to a liquid crystal mounting portion 130 on the back side of the back mount 127 . The ball collecting case 128 is for collecting game balls guided to the back side of the game board 16 after winning the special symbol starting means 31, the variable winning means 32, the normal winning means 33, etc., as shown in FIG. The upper side of the rear wall portion 128 a is arranged to overlap the back side of the cover portion 127 a of the back mounting base 127 . The ball collection case 128 is provided with a discharge port 128b for discharging the game balls downward, and the game balls are discharged out of the machine through the discharge passage 131 from the discharge port 128b. The discharge passage 131 is vertically provided on the front side of the board mounting base 34 .

On the back side of the game board 16, as shown in FIGS. A liquid crystal substrate case 136 for housing is arranged side by side, and a main substrate case 138 for housing a main substrate 137 is arranged on the back side of the ball collection case 128 on the lower side. A performance board case 134 and a liquid crystal board case 136 are attached to the back side of the back mounting base 127 and the ball collecting case 128, and the main board case 138 is attached to the back side of the ball collecting case 128. - 特許庁

As shown in FIGS. 3, 9, 20, and 21, a board mounting base 34 having a discharge passage 131 is fixed to the back side of the lower mounting portion 15 of the inner frame 3, and the back side of the board mounting base 34 is fixed. In addition, a power supply board case 141 that houses a power supply board 140 and a supply board case 143 that houses a supply board 142 are arranged to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

Each substrate case 134, 136, 138, 141, 143 is made of transparent resin, and the substrates 133, 135, 137, 140, 142 inside thereof can be seen through from the back side. Further, the substrate cases 134, 136, 138, 143 are protected by a transparent resin back cover 22, and the substrates 133, 135, 137, 142 can be seen through the back side of the back cover 22. there is

The back cover 22 is an example of a protective cover made of colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. A flat back portion 144 that covers the back parts such as the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, the power board case 141, and the payout board case 143 from the back side, and along the outer peripheral edge of the back part 144 A peripheral portion 145 is integrally formed on the front side to protect the back parts such as the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, etc. from the outer peripheral side. This is to ensure the rigidity of the board case itself and to ensure the security of the back parts such as the board cases 134, 136, 138, 141, 143, and the like. The rear cover 22 is attached to the rear side of the rear protection portion 14 of the inner frame 3 by a third hinge means 21 and a latch means 24 so as to be openable and detachable. A plurality of third hinge means 21 and latch means 24 are provided in the vertical direction.

The rear cover 22 secures a predetermined rigidity by integrally providing a peripheral edge portion 145 on the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface portion 144 . The peripheral edge portion 145 includes bent portions 145a and 145b on both left and right sides and bent portions 145c and 145d on both upper and lower sides. The bending length is partially different depending on the back protection portion 14 and the like so that the front end side abuts or approaches the back protection portion 14 and the like.

For example, the left and right bent portions 145a and 145b of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22 are arranged according to the amount of rearward projection of the attachment portion 20a on one end side and the attachment portion 20b on the other end side of the back protection portion 14. In addition, the bent portion 145a on the one end side corresponding to the attachment portion 20a on the one end side of the back protection portion 14 has a long bending length to the front side, and the other end side corresponding to the attachment portion 20b on the other end side of the back protection portion 14 is long. The bending length to the front side of the bending portion 145b of is shortened.

As shown in FIG. 3, the peripheral portion 145 of the back cover 22 has left and right bent portions 145a and 145b, and upper and lower bent portions 145c and 145d. , and is in contact with the rear end of the upper wall portion 19 of the back protection portion 14 . The upper wall portion 19 of the back protection portion 14 is inclined on the rear end side with which the bent portion 145c on the upper side of the back cover 22 abuts.

The bent portion 145d on the lower side of the back cover 22 is substantially horizontal and protrudes forward to such an extent that the predetermined rigidity d of the back cover 22 can be secured. An outside air introduction portion 146 is formed between the lower bent portion 145d and the board mounting base 34. By introducing outside air from this outside air introduction portion 146 and raising the inside of the back cover 22, a It is designed to dissipate heat from exothermic electronic components. It should be noted that the bent portion 145d on the lower side of the back cover 22 need not be substantially horizontal.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the rear cover 22 is in a closed state in contact with or close to the rear side of the rear protection portion 14 to cover the main board case 138 and the like from the rear side, and in a closed state in which the rear side of the main board case 138 and the like is opened. It can be freely opened and closed around the third hinge means 21 in the opened state. The back cover 22 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame 3 by vertically attaching and detaching the third hinge means 21 in the open state. A restricting means 149 is provided to restrict attachment and detachment.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, when the rear cover 22 is opened from the closed position 22A around the third hinge means 21, the regulation means 149 is provided when the opening angle of the rear cover 22 is less than the predetermined angle α1. restricts the back cover 22 so that it cannot be attached or detached, and releases the restriction of the back cover 22 when the back cover 22 is opened at a predetermined angle α1 or more and is positioned at the attachment/detachment position 22B, and separates the third hinge means 21 vertically. Then, the back cover 22 can be removed from the game machine main bodies 2 and 3.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the restricting means 149 consists of a curved portion 145c on the upper side of the back cover 22 and a guide rail 49 which is arranged near the upper side of the back cover 22 and protrudes rearward from the back cover 22. It is composed of When the back cover 22 is at an angle less than the predetermined angle α1, the bent portion 145c of the back cover 22 is positioned below the guide rail 49 to prevent the back cover 22 from being attached or detached. When the rear cover 22 is opened to the attachment/detachment position 22B, the bent portion 145c of the rear cover 22 is retracted rearward from the guide rail 49 to release the regulation of the rear cover 22. As shown in FIG.

The rear cover 22 has a structure in which a flat rear portion 144 and a peripheral portion 145 bent forward from the outer periphery of the rear portion 144 are integrally provided. In addition to covering the back parts such as 141 and 143 from the back side, the back parts such as the substrate case 134 are protected from the outer peripheral side by the peripheral edge portion 145 that bends forward from the outer periphery of the back surface portion 144 to ensure security. ing.

Therefore, when the back cover 22 is opened at a predetermined angle α1 or more and is positioned at the attachment/detachment position 22B, the upper portion of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22 is retracted to a position where it is separated rearward from the guide rail 49, and the peripheral edge of the back cover 22 is retracted. The lower side of the portion 145 is retreated to a position where it is separated rearward from the back part such as the board case 134, so that the peripheral portion 145 does not interfere with the back mechanism even if the back cover 22 is moved upward.

Therefore, when removing the back cover 22, after releasing the latch means 24, the back cover 22 is rotated around the third hinge means 21 until the bent portion 145c on the upper side of the back cover 22 is disengaged from the guide rail 49 rearward. The rear cover 22 is opened rearward at a predetermined angle α1 or more, and in this state, the back cover 22 is lifted to separate the upper and lower third hinge means 21 and pull them out.

This is because, even if the back cover 22 is opened around the third hinge means 21, if the back cover 22 is at an angle less than the predetermined angle α1, even if the back cover 22 is lifted, it remains below the guide rails 49, The bent portion 145c on the upper side of the cover 22 abuts the lower surface side of the guide rail 49, and the restriction means 149 restricts the removal of the back cover 22, so the back cover 22 is lifted until the third hinge means 21 separates vertically. I can't.

If the rear cover 22 is opened at a predetermined angle α1 or more and is positioned rearward from the attachment/detachment position 22B, the rear cover 22 is detached rearward from the rear end of the guide rail 49. The back cover 22 can be removed because the back cover 22 is no longer in contact with the lower side and the restriction of the back cover 22 by the restricting means 149 can be released. When attaching the back cover 22, the reverse is done.

Thus, when the open angle of the back cover 22 is less than the predetermined angle α1, removal of the back cover 22 is restricted by the restricting means 149, and when the back cover 22 is opened at the predetermined angle α1 or more, the restricting means 149 is closed. The regulation of the back cover 22 is released to make the back cover 22 detachable. As a result, when the back cover 22 is removed, it is possible to prevent the periphery 145 from interfering with the back parts such as the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the dispensing board case 143, and the like. Further, since the guide rail 49 is used as the restricting means 149, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where a dedicated restricting means is provided.

When performing maintenance and inspection of the back side mechanism 17 such as the main board case 138 while the game machine 1 is attached to the island equipment 150 of the game hall, the inner frame 3 is opened around the first hinge means 6 , and in this state, the back cover 22 must be opened around the third hinge means 21 and wrapped around the back side of the inner frame 3 .

In this case, as shown in FIG. 21, if the first hinge means 6 that supports the inner frame 3 and the third hinge means 21 that supports the back cover 22 are on opposite sides, then the back side mechanism 17 is placed in front of the back side mechanism 17 . Since there is the cover 22, an operator enters between the back cover 22 and the island facility 150 to perform maintenance and inspection work. This is the same when an unauthorized person removes the main board case 138 to carry out unauthorized work, and the unauthorized person enters between the open back cover 22 and the island facility 150 as in the inspection. There is a need. Therefore, if the back cover 22 is opened, it becomes very conspicuous, so there is an advantage in that unauthorized manipulations performed with the back cover 22 opened, such as unauthorized manipulation of the main substrate 137, can be prevented.

The bent portion 145b on the other end side of the back cover 22 is fixed to the attachment portion 20b of the side wall portion 18 of the back protection portion 14 by the latch means 24 arranged at the contact portions 152 on both upper and lower ends. 27 and 28, the latch means 24 is of a push-pull type and is arranged in the contact portion 152 of the bent portion 145b of the rear cover 22 and into the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b of the rear protection portion 14. It is provided with an engaging body 154 that engages releasably from the inner peripheral side, and an operating body 155 inserted into the engaging body 154 so as to be able to be pushed and pulled.

The engaging body 154 includes a trunk portion 157 inserted through the through hole 156 of the contact portion 152, a collar portion 158 formed on the rear end side of the trunk portion 157 and in contact with the rear surface of the contact portion 152, and the trunk portion 157. A plurality of engaging claws 159 are provided on the front end side of the mounting hole 153 so as to be expandable and contractible, and the outer peripheral surface engages with the front side of the mounting hole 153 when expanded.

The operation body 155 includes an operation shaft portion 160 inserted through the body portion 157 and the flange portion 158 of the engaging body 154, and a push-pull shaft portion 160 provided on the rear end side of the operation shaft portion 160 and capable of coming into contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 158. and an operating portion 161 for operation, which is provided at the front end of the operating shaft portion 160, and when the operating portion 161 is pushed to the push-in position 161A, the engaging claw 159 expands outward and the operating portion 161 is pulled out to the pull-out position 161B. It also has an expanding/contracting portion 162 that sometimes contracts the engaging claw 159 inward. Note that the operating body 155 is designed not to drop off from the engaging body 154 .

As shown in FIG. 27, when the operation body 155 is pushed to the pushing position 161A, the rear end of the operation portion 161 of the latch means 24 is positioned forward of the rear surface of the rear portion 144 of the rear cover 22. Further, when the operation body 155 is pulled out to the pull-out position 161B, the rear end of the operation portion 161 is approximately the same height as the rear surface of the rear surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, or slightly lower than the rear surface of the rear surface portion 144. .

When the bent portion 145b of the rear cover 22 is fixed to the attachment portion 20b of the rear protection portion 14 by the latch means 24, the following procedure is performed. If the operating body 155 of the latch means 24 is pulled out to the pulled-out position 161B, the engaging claw 159 is pressed against the inner periphery of the mounting hole 153 when the engaging claw 159 is inserted into the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b. , the engaging claw 159 of the engaging body 154 is inserted into the mounting hole 153. As shown in FIG. As a result, the bent portion 145b of the back cover 22 can be fixed to the attachment portion 20b of the back protection portion 14 by the latch means 24. As shown in FIG.

When the engaging claw 159 is inserted into the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b, the contact portion 152 of the rear cover 22 contacts the rear surface of the mounting portion 20b, so that the operating portion 161 of the operating body 155 is pushed forward to the pushed position 161A. push in. At this time, since the expanding/contracting portion 162 of the operating body 155 expands the engaging claw 159 outward, the outer peripheral side of the engaging claw 159 is pressed against the inner circumference of the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b as shown by the solid line in FIG. Then, the engagement member 154 joins the bent portion 145b of the back cover 22 and the attachment portion 20b of the back protection portion 14 in the front-rear direction. As a result, the bent portion 145b of the back cover 22 can be fixed to the attachment portion 20b of the back protection portion 14 by the latch means 24. As shown in FIG.

When the operation body 155 is pushed to the push-in position 161A, the rear end of the operation portion 161 is located in front of the rear surface of the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22, and the rear end of the operation portion 161 is positioned with respect to the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22. is recessed, the latch means 24 will not interfere with other objects.

When opening and closing the rear cover 22, first, the fixing by the latch means 24 is released. In this case, the operating portion 161 of the operating body 155 is grasped with fingers, and the operating body 155 is pulled out to the pull-out position 161B. Then, the expanding/contracting portion 162 of the operating body 155 is disengaged from the engaging claw 159, and the engaging claw 159 is disengaged from the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b by pulling the bent portion 145b side of the back cover 22 rearward. The fixation of the effect board case 134 can be released.

That is, when the operating body 155 is pulled out to the drawn-out position 161B, the expanding/contracting portion 162 is disengaged from the engaging claw 159, so that the engaging claw 159 has its own elastic force or the elasticity of the connecting portion between the engaging claw 159 and the trunk portion 157. The force causes the contraction inward, or the engaging claw 159 becomes elastically deformable inward. Therefore, when the operating portion 161 is pulled further rearward, the engaging claw 159 of the engaging member 154 is pulled out rearward from the mounting hole 153 of the mounting portion 20b as shown in FIG. can be released.

When the operation body 155 of the latch means 24 is pulled out rearward to the pulled-out position 161B, the rear end of the operation part 161 of the operation body 155 is at approximately the same height as the rear surface of the rear surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, or the rear surface portion 144 Since the operation part 161 is slightly lower than the rear surface of the rear cover 22, the operation part 161 does not become an obstacle compared to the case where the operation part 161 protrudes from the rear surface of the rear surface part 144 of the rear cover 22.例文帳に追加

A plurality of three third hinge means 21 are provided in the vertical direction, and as shown in FIGS. A hinge bearing 148 is provided integrally with a side wall portion 18a on one end side of the back protection portion 14, which is a support member, and receives a hinge shaft 147. are arranged in the vertical direction at intervals of .

The hinge shaft 147 has a substantially cylindrical outer peripheral surface, is sufficiently larger in diameter than the plate thickness of the other portion of the back cover 22 , and protrudes downward to the lower side of the support base 165 . The hinge shaft 147 is provided with a tapered insertion head portion 166 on the lower end side, and a concave portion 167 having a substantially U-shaped cross section between the insertion head portion 166 and the support base portion 165 . there is The concave portion 167 is radially recessed from the front side of the hinge shaft 147 and is elongated in the vertical axial direction between the insertion head portion 166 and the support base portion 165 .

Therefore, the hinge shaft 147 has an elliptical shape in which the major diameter portion 147A and the minor diameter portion 147B are arranged substantially perpendicularly, and the open end of the concave portion 167 is positioned on one end side of the minor diameter portion 147B. . A recess 167 of the hinge shaft 147 opens forward.

The support base portion 165 is integrally provided on the front end side of the bent portion 145a. 165b, and a connecting wall 165c arranged substantially perpendicular to the base wall 165a and connecting the upper and lower supporting walls 165b in the vertical direction.

The hinge bearing 148 has a support base portion 169 bent inward from the rear end of the side wall portion 18 a and a holding portion 170 integrally formed on the back side of the support base portion 169 and holding the hinge shaft 147 . The holding portion 170 holds the hinge shaft 147 so as to be rotatable about its axis, and supports the support base portion 165 on the hinge shaft 147 side from below. The support base 165 is provided with molding openings 168 corresponding to the vertical width and the lateral inner width of the holding portion 170 .

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the hinge bearings 148 of the upper two third hinge means 21 among the three upper and lower third hinge means 21, the holding portions 170 are substantially U-shaped in plan view. formed. The holding portion 170 holds the hinge shaft 147 so as to be rotatable about its axis and to be axially insertable and removable.

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the hinge bearing 148 of the third hinge means 21 on the lower side has a pair of holding portions 170 projecting rearward from the support base portion 169 and elastically deformable in the inward and outward directions. A notch 172 for inserting and removing the hinge shaft 147 is formed on the rear end side of the holding member 171 . The pair of holding members 171 can hold the hinge shaft 147 rotatably about its axis and can be inserted and removed in the axial direction. It is also possible to insert and remove the hinge shaft 147 in the front-rear direction.

When the back cover 22 is attached to the back protection portion 14 via the third hinge means 21, after aligning the axis of the hinge shaft 147 of each third hinge means 21 with the holding portion 170 of the hinge bearing 148, The cover 22 is pushed down and each hinge shaft 147 is inserted into the holding portion 170 from the insertion head 166 side.

If the back cover 22 is elongated in the vertical direction, it may be difficult to align the axes of all the hinge shafts 147 of the three third hinge means 21 with the holding portions 170 of the hinge bearings 148 at the same time. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 29, for example, the hinge shafts 147 of the upper two third hinge means 21 are aligned with the holding portions 170 of the two hinge bearings 148, and the lower one is inserted. The hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 is brought into contact with the rear side of the insertion/removal notch 172 of the hinge bearing 148 .

After the hinge shafts 147 of the upper two third hinge means 21 are inserted into the two hinge bearings 148, the hinge shafts are in contact with the rear side of the insertion/removal notch 172 of the hinge bearings 148. 147 is pressed from the back side in the direction of arrow 147a, and the pair of holding members 171 are elastically deformed to insert into the holding portion 170 of the hinge bearing 148 of the third hinge means 21 on the lower side.

In this case, it is not necessary to align all the hinge shafts 147 of the three third hinge means 21 with the three hinge bearings 148 at the same time. Moreover, it is not necessary to increase the rigidity of the rear cover 22 to such an extent that all three hinge shafts 147 coincide with the three hinge bearings 148 at the same time.

The hinge shaft 147 is integrally formed on the rear cover 22 side, and has a concave portion 167 radially recessed from the front side thereof. can be made thinner. Therefore, even if the diameter of the hinge shaft 147 is sufficiently secured, the thickness can be suppressed to about the plate thickness of the back cover 22, and the curing speed of the molten resin on the hinge shaft 147 side during injection molding is slow. Therefore, it is possible to prevent molding distortion from occurring.

When the back cover 22 is molded by the mold, the back cover 22 remains on the movable mold side and is pushed out from the front side by the pushing part of the movable mold side. Therefore, the hinge shaft 147 can be molded in the same manner as the normal injection molding of the back cover 22 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the dispensing means 23, the ball supply passage 51, and the ball guide passage 54 are arranged vertically in a row on the back side of the mounting portion 20a. 145b is arranged inside the dispensing means 23 in the horizontal direction so as not to interfere with the dispensing means 23 and the like.

Therefore, the dimension L1 from the right edge of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3 in rear view to the right edge of the back cover 22 in rear view is from the left edge of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3 in rear view to the left edge of the back cover 22 in rear view (or hinge means) is larger than the dimension L2. As a result, the vertical center line CL1 passing through the horizontal center of the back cover 22 is the third hinge located on the left side of the vertical center line CL2 passing through the horizontal center of the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 in the rear view. It is deviated to the means 21 side. Incidentally, the amount of deviation is about L1-L2/2.

The substrate mounting base 34 is mounted on the back side of the lower mounting portion 15 so as to block the lower ends of the left and right side walls 18a and 18b of the back protection portion 14. A discharge passage 131 is provided for discharging game balls from the discharge port 128b to the outside.

The main board 137 controls game operations on the game board 16 side, is configured in a laterally long shape elongated in the left-right direction, and is housed in a main board case 138 . The performance board 133 controls the performance of the entire game machine 1 based on the signal from the main board 137 and is accommodated in the performance board case 134 . The liquid crystal substrate 135 controls the liquid crystal display means 28 based on the signal from the effect substrate 133 and is accommodated in the liquid crystal substrate case 136 . The payout board 142 controls the payout means 23 based on the game ball payout signal from the main board 137 and is accommodated in the payout board case 143 . The power board 140 supplies power to each part and is housed in a power board case 141 .

Note that the effect board 133 and the liquid crystal board 135 constitute a sub-board for the main board 137, and the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 are a sub-board case (second board case) for the main board case 138 (first board case). 2-substrate case).

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 35, the main board 137 has a laterally long shape that is long in the left-right direction. Various electronic components such as a plurality of connectors 177 are mounted, and a substrate management information display section 178 for displaying substrate management information such as a substrate management number is provided in the vicinity of the lower side. The board management information display section 178 may display necessary information such as a two-dimensional code, a model name, a board name, etc., in addition to directly displaying the board management number.

A plurality of integrated circuit devices 174 are dispersedly arranged on the main substrate 137, and part information such as two-dimensional codes for identification and element names are printed on at least some of the integrated circuit devices 174. A parts information display section 179 is provided.

The connectors 177 are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper part of the main board 137 . The operating means 176 is arranged at a position such as a corner of the main board 137 where it is relatively easy to operate. This operating means 176 is for changing the setting of the jackpot probability in which the special pattern after variation is in a jackpot mode, and can be turned on/off from the back side of the main board case 138 by inserting a dedicated operation key from the rear cover 22 side. is.

On the main board 137 side, apart from the operation means 176, there is provided a probability setting means (not shown) capable of setting a jackpot probability in which the special symbol after variation is in a jackpot mode. When changing the probability setting, an operation key is inserted from the back side of the back cover 22 to turn on the operation means 176 of the main board case 138, then the power is turned on, and then necessary means such as game information clearing means is operated. By doing so, the set value of the jackpot probability of the probability setting means can be changed step by step, and the set value is fixed when the operation key is pulled out and the operation means is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 35, the main board case 138 includes a first case body 180 on the back side which is formed to have a front opening and a flat shape which closes the opening side of the first case body 180 on the front side of the main board 137 . A second case body 181 is openable and closable, and a sealing means 182 is provided at one end in the left-right direction so as to leave an unsealed mark when unsealed. The first case body 180 and the second case body 181 are injection-molded products made of a transparent resin material so that electronic components such as the integrated circuit device 174 inside can be seen through.

Since the main substrate case 138 can be opened/sealed up to three times, four sealing means 182 are provided in the vertical direction according to the number of times of opening/sealing. Of these four sealing means 182, one sealing means 182 is used when sealing the main board case 138 for the first time, and the other three sealing means 182 are used to seal the main board case 138 after opening. is used to seal each time it is closed.

The operation means 176 side and the connector 177 side of the first case body 180 are in contact with or close to the back side of the main substrate 137, and the operation means 176 side and the connector 177 side protrude rearward from the operation hole and the connector hole. is provided. The first case body 180 is provided with a rear wall portion 180a that protrudes rearward so as to face the main substrate 137. The rear wall portion 180a has a large number of heaters that dissipate the heat in the main substrate case 138 to the outside. and a first opening history notation means 184 for entering an opening history when the main substrate case 138 is opened.

The heat dissipation holes 183 are for dissipating the heat generated from the electronic components in the main board case 138 to the outside, and are arranged in a large number in the vertical and horizontal directions in the formation area 185 substantially in the center of the rear wall portion 180a of the first case body 180. ing. A formation area 185 of the heat radiation hole 183 is located between the main substrate management information display portion 178 on the main substrate 137 side, the component information display portion 179 of the integrated circuit device 174, and the first opening history display means 184 of the first case body 180. 178 and component information display section 179 on the main board 137 side, and the heat dissipation performance of the heat dissipation hole 183 by the first unsealing history display means 184 is inhibited. It is set in a position where it does not.

The first unsealing history notation means 184 is for entering the history of opening the main board case 138, and the formation region 185 of the heat radiating hole 183 is provided with a It is attached to the back side of the non-porous area 187 away from the sealing means 182 .

The first unsealing history marking means 184 is composed of an unsealing history marking seal 188 made by applying an adhesive to a transparent sheet that allows the inside of the main substrate case 138 to be seen through. Affixed to the back. On the back side of the back cover 22, an open viewing window 53 is provided in front of and behind the first opening history marking means 184 so that the first opening history marking means 184 side can be directly viewed from the back side without opening the back cover 22. They are provided facing each other.

The first opening history description means 184 includes a management information description section 190 that describes management information such as the management number of the main board 137, and a plurality of opening history description sections 191 that describe the regular opening history of the main board case 138. are provided at predetermined intervals. In this embodiment, there are four sealing means 182, and since it is possible to open/seal up to three times excluding the one sealing means 182 that is initially in a sealed state, the opening/sealing of the three times Three unsealing history marking portions 191 are provided so as to be able to mark the history of closure.

The management information notation section 190 describes the management number of the main substrate 137 and a two-dimensional code indicating it. Further, each opening history description section 191 has an opener description section 191a capable of describing the name of the person who opened it, and an opening time description section 191b capable of describing the opening time such as the date of opening at a predetermined interval. Three unsealing history marking portions 191 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction and are provided below the management information marking portion 190 at predetermined intervals.

The gap between the management information description portion 190 and the opening history description portion 191, the gap between the opening history description portions 191, and the gap between the opener description portion 191a and the opening time description portion 191b of the opening history description portion 191 are: The side of the main substrate 137 may be made transparent through a transparent unsealing history label 188 . On the main substrate 137, among the electronic components including the control elements such as the integrated circuit device 174, the portion (specific portion) requiring high visibility may be arranged so as to correspond to the gap portion.

The management information writing portion 190 and the opening history writing portion 191 are formed by printing opaque ink, paint, or the like on the opening history writing seal 188, or by coating with other opaque portions. The management information writing section 190 and the opening history writing section 191 may be provided directly on the first case body 180 without using the opening history writing seal 188 .

The first case body 180 is provided with a trace 192 of a resin pouring portion on its back side and a trace of an extrusion portion (not shown) on its front side. Although the trace 192 of the resin pouring portion is shown in a shaded manner in FIG. 35 so as to be easily identifiable, the traces of other resin pouring portions are the same.

The resin pouring portion mark 192 is the trace of the resin pouring portion where molten resin was poured into the cavity of the molding die when molding the first case body 180, and the extruding portion trace is the first case body 180 after molding being pushed out of the mold. This is the contact mark of the extruded part at the time. The traces of the resin injection portion 192 and the traces of the push-out portion constitute traces of the resin molding portion used when molding the first case body 180 .

The resin molded parts are the same in the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the power board case 141, the dispensing board case 143, the back cover 22, and the like.

The first case body 180 of the main board case 138 has a heat dissipation hole 183, a resin pouring part mark 192, a resin molding part mark including an extrusion part, and weld lines 192a and 192b. It does not overlap with any of the specific parts such as the part 178 and the component information display part 179 on the integrated circuit device 174 . This is to ensure the visibility of a specific portion of the main board 137 in the main board case 138 .

Two traces 192 of the resin-injection portion of the first case body 180 are provided at positions separated from specific portions on the main substrate 137 side so that weld lines 192a and 192b do not occur corresponding to the specific portions on the main substrate 137 side. It is That is, in the rear wall portion 180a of the first case body 180, non-porous regions 193 positioned near both ends of one diagonal line 180L passing through the forming region 185 of the heat dissipation holes 183 are provided at the time of molding the first case body 180. There are two resin pour traces 192 provided.

Each of the resin pouring portion traces 192 is positioned on both sides of the diagonal line 180L so as to sandwich the forming region 185 of the heat dissipation hole 183 with a predetermined interval therebetween. Molten resin is poured into the cavity of the molding die from two corresponding resin pouring portions for molding.

When the first case body 180 is molded by pouring molten resin from two resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 192, the rear wall portion 180a dissipates substantially half of the heat on the side closer to each resin pouring portion trace 192. A weld line 192a is formed on the downstream side of the hole 183 by the confluence of the molten resin poured from the resin pouring part, and a weld line 192a is formed by the confluence of the molten resin from the two resin pouring parts in the substantially central portion between the two resin pouring parts. A weld line 192 b can connect between the plurality of heat dissipation holes 183 .

The former weld line 192a can be shortened on the downstream side of each heat radiation hole 183, while the latter weld line 192b can be lengthened so as to connect a plurality of heat radiation holes 183 in the direction intersecting the diagonal line 180L corresponding to the resin pouring part. Alternatively, it can be lengthened at a position separated from between the two resin pouring portions in a direction crossing the diagonal line 180L.

Such weld lines 192a and 192b cause an extreme decrease in the tensile strength of the rear wall portion 180a of the first case body 180, and the main substrate 137 in the main substrate case 138 is pushed through the rear wall portion 180a. This is a hindrance to visibility when seeing through a specific portion with a high visibility requirement, such as the component information display section 179 attached to the side integrated circuit device 174 and the board management information display section 178 displayed on the main board 137. Become. Therefore, not only each integrated circuit device 174 but also specific parts such as the component information display section 179 and the board management information display section 178 of the integrated circuit device 174 are arranged at positions away from the regions where the weld lines 192a and 192b are generated. there is

That is, looking at the relationship between the forming area 185 of each heat radiation hole 183 of the main board case 138 and the area where the weld lines 192a and 192b are generated, and each integrated circuit device 174 and board management information display section 178 on the main board 137, Each integrated circuit device 174 and board management information display section 178 are arranged at a position away from not only the weld line 192a, 192b generation area but also the formation area 185 of the heat dissipation hole 183. 138 is also arranged at a position away from each resin pouring portion mark 192 . Therefore, in the main board case 138, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the visibility of specific parts such as the integrated circuit device 174, the component information display section 179, the board management information display section 178, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 36, the effect board 133 has a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction. The parts are appropriately distributed and installed. At least some of the integrated circuit devices 195 among the plurality of integrated circuit devices 195 are provided with a component information display section 199 . A board management information display section 200 is provided on the performance board 133 .

The parts information display section 199 is for displaying the parts information of the integrated circuit device 195, and the parts information is directly displayed by printing, or a sticker printed with the parts information is attached. In the board management information display section 200, the board management information such as the board management number of the effect board 133 is displayed directly by printing, or a sticker printed with the board management information is attached. In addition to the board management number of the effect board 133, the board management information display section 200 may include necessary information such as a two-dimensional code, model name, and board name.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 36, the effect board case 134 can freely open and close a first case body 201 on the back side, which is formed in a front-side opening shape, and a second case body 202 on the front side, which is formed in a flat shape. In addition, the effect board 133 is arranged on the back side of the second case body 202, and the electronic parts and the like of the effect board 133 are covered with the first case body 201 from the back side. For the first case body 201 and the second case body 202, molded products made of transparent resin are used so that the integrated circuit device 195, the component information display section 199, the board management information display section 200, and the like on the effect board 133 side can be seen through from the outside. ing.

The connector 197, 198 side of the first case body 201 is in contact with or close to the back side of the effect board 133, and a connector hole through which the connectors 197, 198 protrude rearward is provided in that portion. The first case body 201 is provided with a rear wall portion 201a protruding rearward so as to face the effect board 133, and the rear wall portion 201a is provided with an operation hole 203 for the volume adjustment means 196 and the effect board. A large number of heat radiation holes 204 are provided to radiate the heat inside the case 134 to the outside.

The volume control means 196 has a rotary operation type operation shaft 196a, and the operation hole 203 is formed at the bottom of a recessed portion 205 integrally recessed from the rear wall portion 201a toward the effect board 133 side. In the open state, the sound volume can be adjusted by inserting a tool such as a screwdriver through the operation hole 203 and rotating the operation shaft 196a.

The heat dissipation holes 204 are for dissipating heat generated from the electronic components in the effect board case 134 to the outside, and are arranged in a large number in the formation area 206 of the rear wall portion 201a of the first case body 201 in the vertical and horizontal directions. The formation area 206 of the heat dissipation hole 204 is provided in a wide area so as to ensure heat dissipation without impairing the visibility of specific parts such as the component information display section 199 and the board management information display section 200 on the side of the effect board 133. A large number of heat dissipation holes 204 are arranged vertically and horizontally in this formation region 206 .

On the rear wall portion 201a of the first case body 201, the performance board 133 side is provided so that weld lines 208a and 208b do not occur in specific parts such as the component information display section 199 and the board management information display section 200 on the performance board 133 side. There are a plurality of, for example, three, resin pouring portion traces 207 at positions outside the specific portion of the heat radiation hole 204 and surrounding the forming region 206 of the heat dissipation hole 204 .

Accordingly, the first case body 201 is molded by injection molding by pouring molten resin into the cavity of the molding die from three resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 207 .

When molding is performed by pouring molten resin from such three resin pouring parts, a short weld line 208a is formed downstream of the heat releasing hole 204 located near each resin pouring part. On the other hand, even between the three resin pouring portions, a relatively long weld line is formed in the intermediate portion between the adjacent resin pouring portions so as to connect a plurality of heat dissipation holes 204 in a direction crossing the direction connecting the two resin pouring portions. 208b. This is the same as for the main board case 138 .

Even if the weld lines 208a and 208b are generated on the rear wall portion 201a of the first case body 201 in this way, the weld lines 208a and 208b are located outside the specific portion on the effect board 133 side. 208a and 208b do not lower the visibility of the specific portion on the effect board 133 side.

In this embodiment, the integrated circuit device 195 is located within the forming region 206 of the heat dissipation hole 204 , but the heat dissipation hole 204 may be provided so as not to overlap the integrated circuit device 195 . Also, although a portion of the resin pouring portion trace 207 overlaps a portion of the integrated circuit device 195 , the resin pouring portion trace 207 may not overlap the integrated circuit device 195 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 37, the liquid crystal substrate 135 has a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction like the effect substrate 133. On the back surface of the liquid crystal substrate 135, a plurality of electronic components such as integrated circuit devices 210 and connectors 211 are mounted. are distributed appropriately. At least some of the integrated circuit devices 210 among the plurality of integrated circuit devices 210 are provided with a component information display section 212 . A substrate management information display section 213 is provided on the liquid crystal substrate 135 .

The component information display section 212 is for displaying the component information of the integrated circuit device 210, and is designed to display directly by printing or to attach a seal on which the component information is printed. Board management information such as the board management number of the liquid crystal board 135 is displayed on the board management information display section 213 by printing. Note that the substrate management information may be displayed by means other than printing. In addition to the substrate management number of the liquid crystal substrate 135, the substrate management information display section 213 may display necessary information such as a two-dimensional code, model name, and substrate name.

The liquid crystal substrate case 136, like the effect substrate case 134, includes a first case body 218 on the back side that is formed in a front-side opening shape, and a second case body 219 on the front side that is formed in a flat shape. A liquid crystal substrate 135 is fixed to the back side of the body 219 , and the electronic components and the like of the liquid crystal substrate 135 are covered with a first case body 218 from the back side. The first case body 218 and the second case body 219 are made of a transparent resin material so that specific parts such as the component information display section 212 and the substrate management information display section 213 of the integrated circuit device 210 on the liquid crystal substrate 135 side can be seen through from the outside. Injection molded products are used.

The connector 211 side of the first case body 218 abuts or is close to the back side of the liquid crystal substrate 135, and a connector hole through which the connector 211 protrudes rearward is provided in that portion. The first case body 218 is provided with a rear wall portion 218a that protrudes rearward so as to face the liquid crystal substrate 135. The rear wall portion 218a has a large number of heaters that dissipate the heat in the liquid crystal substrate case 136 to the outside. of heat dissipation holes 214 are provided.

The heat dissipation holes 214 are for dissipating heat generated from the electronic components in the liquid crystal substrate case 136 to the outside, and are arranged in a large number in the formation area 215 of the rear wall portion 218a of the first case body 218 in the vertical and horizontal directions. The formation area 215 of the heat dissipation hole 214 is wide enough to ensure heat dissipation without impairing the visibility of specific parts such as the component information display section 212 and the board management information display section 213 of the integrated circuit device 210 on the liquid crystal substrate 135 side. A large number of heat radiation holes 214 are arranged vertically and horizontally in this formation region 215 .

On the rear wall portion 218a of the first case body 218, the parts information display portion 212 on the side of the liquid crystal substrate 135, the substrate management information display portion 213, and other specific portions are provided with weld lines 216a and 216b from the specific portions so that weld lines 216a and 216b do not occur. There are a plurality of, for example, three, resin pouring portion traces 217 at the deviated position and at the position surrounding the forming region 215 of the heat dissipation hole 214 .

Therefore, the first case body 218 is molded by injection molding in which molten resin is poured into the cavity of the molding die from three resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 217 .

When molding is performed by pouring molten resin from three resin pouring parts, a short weld line 216a is formed downstream of the heat releasing hole 214 located near each resin pouring part. On the other hand, even between the three resin pouring portions, a relatively long weld line is formed in the intermediate portion between the adjacent resin pouring portions so as to connect a plurality of heat dissipation holes 214 in a direction crossing the direction connecting the two resin pouring portions. 216b. This is the same as for the main board case 138 .

Even if the weld lines 216a and 216b are generated on the rear wall portion 218a of the first case body 218 in this manner, the weld lines 216a and 216b are located outside the specific portion on the liquid crystal substrate 135 side. 216a and 216b do not reduce the visibility of the specific portion on the liquid crystal substrate 135 side.

In this embodiment, part of the integrated circuit device 210 is in the area 215 where the heat radiation holes 214 are formed, but the heat radiation holes 214 may be provided so as not to overlap each integrated circuit device 210 . Moreover, although the trace 217 of the resin pouring portion overlaps the integrated circuit device 210 , it is desirable that it does not overlap the integrated circuit device 210 .

When comparing the importance in the gaming machine 1 of the main board 137 housed in the main board case 138, the effect board 133 housed in the effect board case 134, and the sub-boards such as the liquid crystal board 135 housed in the liquid crystal board case 136, The importance of the main board 137 (first board), which determines the game content of the gaming machine 1 itself, is greater than that of the sub-boards (second boards) such as the effect board 133, the liquid crystal board 135, etc., which simply control the effect operation. is much larger. Therefore, the main board case 138 (first board case) that houses the main board 137 is required to have higher strength than the effect board case 134 (second board case) that houses the effect board 133. There is a demand for high visibility for specific parts of

On the other hand, when resin-molding the main board case 138, effect board case 134, etc., if the number of resin pouring parts is increased, the cycle time required for molding each board case 138, 134 can be shortened, and there is the advantage of efficient manufacturing. On the other hand, there is a problem that the number of traces 192, 207 of the resin pouring portion increases and visibility of the inside deteriorates. In addition, if the number of traces 192, 207 of the resin pouring portion increases, the number of weld lines 192a, 192b, 208a, 208b formed between the resin pouring portions also increases. As a result, the visibility of the inside of the board cases 138 and 134 is lowered, and the strength of the board cases 138 and 134 themselves is also lowered.

Therefore, regardless of whether the volume of the synthetic resin portion of the main board case 138 and the sub board case such as the effect board case 134 is approximately the same, or whether the volume of the main board case 138 is larger or smaller than that of the sub board case, Do the following: For example, the number of resin pouring portion traces (or resin pouring portions) 192 of the first case body 180 of the main board case 138 is N2 (N2≧1), and the sub-boards such as the first case body 201 of the effect board case 134 are It is assumed that the number of traces of resin pouring portions (or resin pouring portions) 207 on the case side is N2+n2 (n2≧0). As a result, the strength and visibility of the main board case 138 side can be improved compared to the performance board case 134 side.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the number N2 of resin pouring portion traces 192 of the first case body 180 of the main board case 138 is two, and the number of resin pouring portion traces 207 of the first case body 201 of the effect board case 134 is N2+n2. 1 less than 3.

The second case bodies 181 and 202 sides of the main board case 138 and the effect board case 134 are both flat, and correspond to the back sides of the boards 133 and 137 themselves. ) may be the same number, or may be the same as the traces of resin pouring portions (or resin pouring portions) on the first case body 180, 201 side.

The power supply board 140 has a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction, and electronic components such as an electrolytic capacitor 230 and a connector are mounted on the back side of the power supply board 140 as shown in FIG. The power board 140 supplies power to the main board 137, effect board 133, liquid crystal board 135, payout board 142, and other parts through connectors and harnesses.

The power supply board case 141 has a laterally long shape so as to accommodate the power supply board 140, and as shown in FIG. The power board 140 is accommodated in the opening side of the first case body 231, and the power board 140 is pressed from the front side by the second case body 232. there is

In the first case body 231, a plurality of heat radiation holes 233 are formed in the left-right direction on the back side of the rear wall portion 231a facing the power supply substrate 140 and on both upper and lower corners thereof. Outside air is introduced from the lower heat radiation hole 233 to cool the electronic components of the power supply board 140, and the hot air is discharged from the upper heat radiation hole 233 of the first case body 231 to the outside. there is

The first case body 231 and the second case body 232 of the power board case 141 are also molded in the same manner as the first case body 180 of the main board case 138 and the like.

The payout board 142 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with a lateral length slightly shorter than that of the power supply board 140 and a vertical width slightly larger than that of the power supply board 140 . 21 and 38, electronic components such as a plurality of integrated circuit devices 235, game information clear means 236, payout error display means 237, and connectors 238 are mounted on the rear side of the payout board 142. A board management information display section 239 for displaying board management information such as a management number is provided.

At least some of the integrated circuit devices 235 among the plurality of integrated circuit devices 235 are provided with a component information display section 240 on which management information such as two-dimensional codes and element names are printed. The game information clearing means 236 is composed of a RAM clear switch having a push-button type operation portion 236a, and is arranged at a position on the payout board 142 that is easy to operate. The game information clearing means 236 is originally for clearing the game information stored in the RAM constituting the game information storage means (not shown) on the main board 137 side when the operating portion 236a is pressed. However, it is also used for changing the set value of the jackpot probability in stages.

The payout error display means 237 is for displaying the occurrence of an error on the payout means 23 side. The type of error that has occurred is indicated by light emission using identification information such as numbers from 1 to 5.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 38, the dispensing board case 143 has a rear side first case body 241 formed in a front opening shape and a flat front side second case body 242 which can be opened and closed freely. In addition, the printed circuit board 142 is arranged on the back side of the second case body 242 , and the electronic components and the like of the printed circuit board 142 are covered with the first case body 241 from the back side. The first case body 241 and the second case body 242 are made of a transparent resin so that the component information display section 240, the delivery error display means 237, the board management information display section 239, etc. of the integrated circuit device 235 on the delivery board 142 side can be seen through from the outside. Molded products are used.

The connector 238 side and the game information clearing means 236 side of the first case body 241 are in contact with or close to the back side of the payout board 142, and the connector 238 and the game information clearing means 236 are projected backward at that portion. A through hole is provided. The first case body 241 is provided with a rear wall portion 241a that bulges rearwardly so as to face the printed substrate 142. The rear wall portion 241a is provided with a large number of heat sinks for dissipating the heat in the printed substrate case 143 to the outside. A heat radiation hole 243, an error information display means 245 for displaying error information of the dispensing means 23, and an unsealing history display means 246 for notating the unsealing history of the dispensing board case 143 are provided.

Since the supplied substrate case 143 can be opened and sealed up to two times, sealing means 247 that can be sealed so as to leave an unsealing mark at the time of opening is provided on one of the left and right ends of the supplied substrate case 143 in the vertical direction. 3 are provided in the Of these three sealing means 247, one sealing means 247 is used for sealing the first delivered substrate case 143, and the other two sealing means 247 are used for sealing the delivered substrate case 143 after unsealing. is used to seal each time it is closed.

The heat dissipation holes 243 are for dissipating heat generated from the electronic components in the delivery board case 143 to the outside, and are arranged in a large number in the formation area 244 of the rear wall portion 241 a of the first case body 241 . The formation area 244 of the heat dissipation holes 243 is provided over a wide area so as to ensure heat dissipation without impairing the visibility of specific parts such as the component information display section 240 and the board management information display section 239 on the payout board 142 side. A large number of heat radiation holes 243 are arranged vertically and horizontally in this formation region 244 .

The unsealing history marking means 246 is composed of an unsealing history marking seal 248 made by applying an adhesive to a transparent sheet that allows the inside of the dispensing board case 143 to be seen through. affixed to. The opening history marking seal 248 is provided with upper and lower opening history marking portions 249 for marking the regular opening history of the dispensing board case 143 .

The opening history marking portion 249 includes an opener marking portion 249a capable of marking the name of the person who opened the package, and an opening time marking portion 249b capable of marking the date of opening, arranged in a line in the left-right direction at a predetermined interval. Each time the dispensing board case 143 is sealed after being opened, the name of the person who opened it is indicated in the opening person marking portion 249a, and the date of opening is indicated in the opening time marking portion 249b.

It should be noted that the unsealing history marking means 246 is composed of an opaque portion formed by printing opaque ink, paint, or the like. The board management information display section 239 and the unsealing history display section 249 may be provided directly on the first case body 241 without using a stuck sticker.

The error information display means 245 is provided on the back side of the non-hole area 250 away from the formation area 244 of the heat radiation holes 243, and the error information display means 245 displays "1. Dispensing is stopped", "2. Full error "3. Out-of-ball error", "4. Dispensing error", "5. Ball clogging error", etc.

On the rear wall portion 241a of the first case body 241, specific portions such as the component information display section 240 and the board management information display section 239 on the side of the board to be delivered 142 are displayed. and the opening history marking means 246 does not overlap the weld lines 251a and 251b, respectively, at a specific portion on the payout board 142 side, at a position outside the error information display means 245 and the opening history marking portion 249 on the payout board case 143 side, In addition, there are a plurality of, for example, three resin pouring portion traces 252 at positions surrounding the forming region 244 of the heat dissipation hole 243 . Accordingly, the first case body 241 is molded by injection molding by pouring molten resin into the cavity of the molding die from three resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 252 . The number of resin pouring portion traces 252 is N2+n2.

Even when the first case body 241 is molded by pouring the molten resin from such three resin pouring portions, the heat dissipation holes 243 located on the side closer to the resin pouring portions are positioned closer to the respective resin pouring portions, as in the case of the effect board case 134 . On the side, a short weld line 251a is formed downstream of the heat radiation hole 243. As shown in FIG. Also, between the three resin pouring portions, a relatively long weld line 251b can be formed in the intermediate portion between the adjacent resin pouring portions in a direction crossing the direction connecting the two resin pouring portions. A relatively long weld line 251b is formed so as to connect a plurality of heat radiation holes 243 in a direction crossing the connecting direction.

Even if the weld lines 251a and 251b are generated on the rear wall portion 241a of the first case body 241 in this manner, the weld lines 251a and 251b are located outside the specific portion on the payout substrate 142 side. The lines 251a and 251b do not reduce the visibility of the specific portion on the payout substrate 142 side.

A part of the integrated circuit device 235 corresponds to the formation area 244 of the heat radiation hole 243 and the error information display means 245, but the integrated circuit device 235 may be provided so as not to overlap the heat radiation hole 243 and the error information display means 245. good. Moreover, it is desirable that the trace 252 of the resin pouring portion does not overlap the integrated circuit device 235 and the error information display means 245 .

The main board 137, effect board 133, liquid crystal board 135, payout board 142, etc. are connected as shown in FIG. The connector 177a of the main board 137 is connected to the connector 197a of the effect board 133 via a plurality of or multiple harnesses 255. As shown in FIG. The connector 177b of the main board 137 is connected to the connector 238a of the payout board 142 via a harness 256. As shown in FIG. Further, the connector 177c of the main board 137 is connected to the game parts such as the variable prize winning means 32 on the game board 16 side via the harness 257, relay board (not shown) and the like.

The connector 197b of the effect board 133 is connected to the connector 211a of the liquid crystal board 135 via a plurality or multiple harnesses 258, and the connector 198a of the effect board 133 is connected to the movable effect means 97 or the like via a harness 259. It is The connector 211 b of the liquid crystal substrate 135 is connected to the liquid crystal display means 28 via a harness 260 . The connector 238 a of the payout board 142 is connected to the payout means 23 via a harness 261 .

As shown in FIGS. 3, 4, 20, 21, and 40 to 42, on the side of the rear portion 144 of the rear cover 22, a large number of heat dissipation holes 264 for dissipating heat in the rear cover 22, An operation hole 265 corresponding to the probability setting operation means 176, an operation hole 266 corresponding to the game information clearing means 236, a viewing window 267 corresponding to the opening history display means 184, and a viewing corresponding to the error information display means 245. A window 268 and a viewing window 269 corresponding to the opening history notation means 246 are provided.

The operation holes 265 and 266 have cylindrical portions 265a and 266a projecting forward from the back surface portion 144, and when operating the operation means 176 and the game information clearing means 236, the back cover 22 is kept closed. A fingertip or other object is inserted into the cylindrical portions 265a and 266a of the operation holes 265 and 266 from the back side of the cover 22, and an operation such as pressing the operation means 176 and the game information clear means 236 is performed.

Visible windows 267 and 269 for the opening history marking means 184 and 246 are formed corresponding to the substrate cases 138 and 143 of the back portion 144 of the back cover 22, and the back cover 22 can be viewed while the back cover 22 is closed. 22, the written information of the opening history marking portions 191 and 249 of the opening history marking means 184 and 246 can be easily read. Therefore, it is not necessary to open and close the back cover 22 each time the written information of the opening history writing means 184, 246 is checked.

Since the back cover 22 is a transparent resin molding, it is also possible to check the written information of the management information display sections 178 and 239 and the component information display sections 179 and 240 through the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22. Therefore, it is not always necessary to provide opening-like viewing windows corresponding to the management information display sections 178 and 239 and the component information display sections 179 and 240 .

Error information displayed on the payout error display means 237 can be checked from the rear side of the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22 while the rear cover 22 is closed. A viewing window 268 corresponding to the error information display means 245 is provided in the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 in an open shape, and the display information of the error information display means 245 can be viewed through the viewing window 268. .

When an error occurs in connection with the putting out of game balls by the putting out means 23, the putting out error display means 237 displays the error information. Therefore, by looking at the error information of the dispensing error display means 237 in the dispensing substrate case 143 from the back side of the rear cover 22, it is possible to easily confirm the location where the dispensing means 23 has generated an error.

If the location of the error cannot be determined only by the display of the error information on the payout error display means 237, the location of the error can be easily confirmed by collating it with the information displayed on the error information display means 245 through the viewing window 268. can do.

The heat radiation holes 264 are concentrated in the upper portion 22U of the back portion 144 of the back cover 22. As shown in FIG. The rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 is roughly divided into an upper portion 22U corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, and a lower portion 22D corresponding to the main board case 138, the power board case 141 and the dispensing board case 143. can be dichotomy. Therefore, when comparing the distribution of the heat radiation holes 264 in the upper portion 22U and the lower portion 22D, the heat radiation holes 264 are distributed substantially uniformly over the entire upper portion 22U. It is not provided in the portion 22D. Each heat radiation hole 264 is elongated in the left-right direction, and is arranged with a predetermined interval between adjacent heat radiation holes 264 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction.

The heat radiation hole 264 of the back cover 22 is not arranged in the vicinity of the operation shaft 196a of the volume control means 196, and a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted through the heat radiation hole 264 to operate the volume control means 196. Axis 196a cannot be manipulated. Therefore, the operating means 176 and the game information clearing means 236 can be operated from the back side of the back cover 22 without opening the back cover 22, but the volume adjusting means 196 cannot be operated unless the back cover 22 is opened. . This is because the volume adjustment means 196 is operated less frequently than the operation means 176 and game information clear means 236 are operated.

In providing the heat radiation holes 264 in the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 in this manner, the heat radiation holes 264 are arranged substantially evenly over the entire upper portion 22U of the back cover 22, so that the high temperature that tends to stay in the upper part of the back cover 22 is prevented. Air can be discharged to the outside through the heat dissipation holes 264 . As a result, air convection occurs in the back cover 22, and external cold air can be introduced from the outside air introduction part 146 on the lower end side of the back cover 22, and hot air can be discharged from the heat radiation hole 264 at the top. H.264 can efficiently dissipate heat.

Further, in the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22, the lower portion 22D corresponding to the main board case 138 and the dispensing board case 143 is provided with operation holes 265 and 266 and viewing windows 267 to 269. Since the heat dissipation hole 264 and other openings are not provided in almost the entire area of the portion 22D, the main board 137 and the payout board 142 are shown from the back side of the rear cover 22 through the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143. can be easily visually recognized, and deterioration of the visibility of specific portions of the main substrate 137 and the dispensing substrate 142 can be prevented.

Moreover, since the lower portion 22D of the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 is in a non-perforated state with no openings other than the operation holes 265 and 266 and the viewing windows 267 to 269, the lower portion 22D of the rear portion 144 is opened. As compared with the case where there is, the upward flow of air on the lower side inside the back cover 22 can be promoted. Therefore, the air convection in the back cover 22 can be further promoted.

Since the heat radiation holes 264 are elongated in the left-right direction, the opening area of each heat radiation hole 264 can be increased compared to the case of round holes, and the number of the heat radiation holes 264 can be reduced. can do.

Harness 255 that bends in a U-shape to the back side with a predetermined margin between the connectors 177a and 197a that are vertically close to each other, such as the connector 177a of the main board 137 and the connector 197a of the effect board 133. In the case of vertical connection by means of a vertical connection, the vertical harness 255 may come into contact or pressure contact with the inside of the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22 .

Even in such a case, by forming the heat radiation hole 264 in the shape of an elongated hole in the left-right direction, the heat radiation hole 264 extends in the left-right direction with respect to the harness 255 in the vertical direction. It does not appear on the back side of the back cover 22. - 特許庁

The harness 258 connecting the connector 197b of the effect board 133 and the connector 211a of the liquid crystal board 135 is arranged in the horizontal direction, and the horizontal interval between the two connectors 197b and 211a is equal to the vertical interval between the connectors 177a and 197a. Since the harness 258 is sufficiently large in comparison, the length of the harness 258 in the left-right direction is long, and since it is not necessary to bend or bend the harness 255 extremely between the connectors 177a and 197a, the heat radiation hole 264 is not required to be bent. The harness 258 does not protrude from the heat dissipation hole 264 to the back side of the back cover 22 unless it is extremely long.

As shown in FIGS. 3, 41, and 42, on the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22, a plurality of traces 280 of the resin pouring portion and traces 281 of the extrusion portion are formed at positions deviating from specific portions of the substrates 133 and 137. be. This resin pouring portion trace 280 indicates the trace of the resin pouring portion where the molten resin was poured into the cavity of the molding die when the back cover 22 was molded. They are distributed so that the molten resin can be poured evenly.

In the upper portion 22U in which a large number of heat radiation holes 264 are arranged, the large number of heat radiation hole molding portions of the mold act as flow obstruction portions for the molten resin, so that the flow resistance is large when the molten resin flows in the cavity. Therefore, it is necessary to pour the molten resin from the resin pouring part against the flow resistance. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is molded, the upper portion 22U has many resin pouring portions, and as a result, the upper portion 22U of the back cover 22 has many resin pouring portion marks 280. - 特許庁A plurality of, for example, N3 traces of the resin pouring portion 280 are provided from the intermediate portion to the peripheral portion of the forming region 282 of the heat dissipation hole 264 .

The upper portion 22U of the back cover 22 has a large number of heat dissipation holes 264, and push-out resistance occurs between the heat dissipation holes 264 and the many heat-dissipating hole molding portions of the mold, and push-out resistance occurs at the peripheral edge portion 145. Extruded portion traces 281a and 281b are provided far more than the number of resin pouring portion traces 280. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 , the resin pouring portion marks 280 are arranged outside the rear portion 144 of the rear cover 22 . On the other hand, the extruded portion mark 281 a is circular and arranged on the front side of the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 , and the extruded portion trace 281 b is semicircular and arranged at the front end of the peripheral portion 145 .

The lower portion 22D, which has the operation holes 265, 266 and the viewing windows 267 to 269 and is nearly non-porous, has a smaller flow resistance than the upper portion 22U when the molten resin flows in the cavity. Since the molten resin circulates quickly in the cavity, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 is also smaller than in the upper portion 22U.

Moreover, in the lower part 22D, the main board case 138 and the payout board case 138 are arranged so that the visibility of specific parts of the main board 137 and payout board 142 is not impaired by the traces 280 of the resin pouring portion and the weld lines 283 generated during molding. In the vicinity of the outer periphery of 143, there are a relatively small number of traces 280 of the resin pouring portion.

That is, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 on the lower portion 22D of the back cover 22 is N3-n3 (N3>n3≧1), and the upper portion 22U located near the upper side of the main circuit board case 138 has two traces. Even if the traces 280 of resin pouring parts are included, there are only about four traces, one between the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143 and one outside the payout board case 143 . .

In addition, resin molded parts such as the resin pouring part marks 280 of the lower part 22D of the back cover 22 and weld lines 283, and resin molded parts such as the resin pouring part marks 192 and 252 of the main board case 138 and the dispensing case 143 and weld lines Lines 192a, 192b, 251a, and 251b are designed not to overlap specific portions of main board 137 and delivery board 142, even though they may overlap each other.

The entire back cover 22 is divided into a hinge side portion 22L on the side of the first hinge means 6 and a non-hinge side portion 22R on the side opposite to the first hinge means 6 with the center line CL1 as a boundary. When the number NX of 280 is compared, the number NR of the resin pouring portions 280 in the anti-hinge side portion 22R having a large volume is larger than the number NL of the resin pouring portions 280 in the hinge side portion 22L having a small volume.

This is because, of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the rear cover 22, the bending length of the bending portion 145a toward the front side is longer than the bending length of the bending portion 145b toward the front side. This is because the volume is larger than the volume of the hinge side portion 22L. As a result, during molding of the back cover 22, the molten resin can be substantially evenly poured into the cavity of the mold opposite to the hinge side portion 22R and the cavity of the hinge side portion 22L in a short period of time.

Incidentally, the number NL of resin pouring portion traces 280 on the non-hinge side portion 22R of the back cover 22 is four, and the number NR of the resin pouring portion traces 280 on the hinge side portion 22L is three. The numbers NL=4 and NR=3 of the resin pouring portion traces 280 are merely examples.

Five resin-injection traces 280 of the anti-hinge-side portion 22R are arranged in the vertical direction dispersedly near the bent portion 145c and on the central side of the back surface portion 144. As shown in FIG. Also, the traces 280 of the resin pouring portion of the hinge-side portion 22L are dispersed in the vertical direction on the back portion 144 in the vicinity of the bent portions 145b, 145c, and 145d. Therefore, it is possible to improve circulation of the molten resin from the outer peripheral portion 145 side to the cavity on the side of the rear portion 144 in the vicinity thereof.

The resin pouring portion trace 280 of the hinge side portion 22L is in the vicinity of the bent portions 145b, 145c, and 145d, but the resin pouring portion trace 280 is only on the center side of the rear surface portion 144 in the left-right direction, and the hinge side portion There is no resin pouring portion mark 280 on the left and right central side of 22L. This is because the melted resin in the cavity in the central portion of the back portion 144 is well circulated.

Even if the molten resin is poured into the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 from the resin pouring portion corresponding to the resin pouring portion mark 280, the integrated circuit devices 174, 195, 210 on the substrates 133, 135, 137, 142 side will not be removed. , 235 of the component information display portions 179, 199, 212, 240 and the board management information display portions 178, 200, 213, 239 of the substrates 133, 135, 235, etc. so that the weld line 283 does not occur corresponding to a specific portion. Traces 192, 207, 217, and 252 of resin pouring portions are present at positions deviated from specific portions on the 137, 142 side.

At the time of injection molding of the back cover 22, the molten resin is poured into the cavity of the molding die from the resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 280 for molding. In this case, on the opening side of the heat radiation holes 264 and the like, a short weld line (not shown) is formed due to the confluence of the molten resin poured from the resin pouring part on the downstream side of each heat radiation hole 264 on the side closer to each resin pouring part. In addition, a long weld line 283 formed by merging the molten resin from the two resin pouring parts can connect the plurality of heat radiation holes 264 in the intermediate part between two adjacent resin pouring parts.

These resin pouring portion traces 280 are positioned so as to sandwich the forming region 282 of the heat dissipation hole 264 with a predetermined interval therebetween. It is molded by pouring molten resin from the part into the cavity of the molding die.

When the back cover 22 is molded by pouring molten resin from the two resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 280, the back surface portion 144 has substantially half of the heat radiation holes 264 on the downstream side near the respective resin pouring portions. In addition, a weld line (not shown) is formed by the confluence of the molten resin poured from the resin pouring part, and a weld line is formed by the confluence of the molten resin from the two resin pouring parts at the approximate center between the two resin pouring parts. 283 can connect between the plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 .

The former weld line can be shortened on the downstream side of each heat dissipation hole 264, but the latter weld line 283 can be lengthened so as to connect the plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 in the direction intersecting the diagonal direction corresponding to the resin pouring part. Alternatively, it can be elongated at a position spaced apart in a direction intersecting the diagonal direction from between the two resin pouring portions.

Such a weld line 283 causes an extreme decrease in the tensile strength of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, and also causes the substrates 133, 135, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137, 137 from the back side of the back cover 22 through the back surface portion 144. This is a hindrance to visibility when viewing a specific portion on the 142 side. However, it is possible to prevent the weld line 283 generated on the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22 from overlapping specific portions of the substrates 133, 135, 137, and 142 by considering the arrangement position of the resin pouring portion. , and visibility is not hindered by the weld line 283 .

For example, looking at the positional relationship of each resin pouring portion mark 280 and each weld line 283 of the back cover 22, the upper portion 22U of the back portion 144 is as shown in FIG. 42.

That is, on the side of the upper portion 22U of the back surface portion 144, as shown in FIG. The weld line e between the resin The weld line s is between the resin pouring portion trace a and the resin pouring portion trace g, the weld line j is between the resin pouring portion trace d and the resin pouring portion trace i, and the resin pouring portion trace b and the resin pouring portion trace i. Weld lines k are generated between and respectively.

Each weld line 283 on the side of the upper portion 22U is generated at a position away from specific portions such as the component information display portions 199 and 212 of the effect substrate 133 and the liquid crystal substrate 135, the substrate management information display portions 200 and 213, and the like. Therefore, the traces 207, 217 and weld lines 208b, 216b of the resin pouring portions 207, 217 and the weld lines 208b, 216b on the side of the rear wall portions 201a, 218a of the substrate cases 134, 136 are displayed in the parts information display portions 199, 212 of the production substrate 133 and the liquid crystal substrate 135, and the substrate management information display. Although there are many heat dissipation holes 264 in the back part 144 of the weld line 283 and the fact that the parts 200 and 213 are out of the specific part, the weld line 283 etc. hinder the visibility of the specific part. never

In the lower portion 22D of the back surface portion 144, as shown in FIG. There is a weld line n between, a weld line o between the resin pouring portion trace i and the resin pouring portion trace l, and a weld line q between the resin pouring portion trace i and the resin pouring portion trace p. A weld line r is generated between the mark l and the resin pouring portion mark p.

Each weld line 283 of the lower part 22D is generated at a position separated from specific parts such as the component information display sections 179 and 240 and the board management information display sections 178 and 239 of the main board 137 and the supply board 142. FIG. Therefore, traces of the resin pouring portion 280 and the weld line 283 on the side of the rear wall portions 180a, 241a of the substrate cases 138, 143 are not visible in the component information display portions 179, 240 and the substrate management information display portions 178, 239 of the main substrate 137 and the payout substrate 142. In addition to being outside the specific portion such as the weld line, the visibility of the specific portion is not hindered by the weld line or the like. In addition, since the rear surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 does not have heat dissipation holes corresponding to the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143, the effect board 133 side and the liquid crystal board 135 side, which have many heat dissipation holes 204 and 214, Visibility is further improved by comparison.

When the back cover 22 is injection-molded, molten resin is poured into the cavity between the projecting movable mold and the recessed fixed mold. After curing the resin, mold opening is performed to separate the movable mold from the fixed mold, and the molded product for the back cover 22 remaining on the movable mold side is pushed out by an push-out part such as a push-out pin on the movable mold side.

The extruded portion traces 281a and 281b are traces of the extruded portions that were brought into contact with the molded product when the mold was removed. , and a large number of traces 281a and 281b of the extruded portions are left on the back surface portion 144 and the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22. As shown in FIG.

The extruded portion trace 281a of the rear surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 is circular, and the extruded portion trace 281b of the peripheral edge portion 145 is semicircular. On the upper side of the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22, a large number of extruded portion traces 281a are arranged between the heat dissipation holes 264 so as to be substantially evenly distributed over the entire area 282 where the heat dissipation holes 264 are formed. Further, on the lower side of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, they are arranged corresponding to the peripheral portion of the main board case 138 and the peripheral portion of the payout board case 143. As shown in FIG. Note that, on the delivered board case 143 side, pushed-out portion traces 281a are arranged in peripheral portions such as the four corners of the viewing window 268 for the error display portion of the delivered board 142 .

Therefore, although the upper portion 22U of the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 has a large number of heat radiation holes 264 and is structurally complicated and has a large push-out resistance, a large number of heat radiation holes 264 are provided over substantially the entire region 282 where the heat radiation holes 264 are formed. , the push-out resistance of the back cover 22 can be sufficiently resisted by the push-out portions corresponding to the push-out traces 281a.

On the other hand, the lower portion 22D of the rear surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 does not have a heat radiation hole 264 and the like, and has a planar spread compared to the upper portion, so that the pushing resistance is small. less than the upper side. In the lower part 22D of the back cover 22, it is important to ensure visibility with respect to the main board 137 and the payout board 142. , a small number of extruded portion traces 281 a and 281 b are arranged in the peripheral portions of the main board case 138 and the ejected board case 143 . Accordingly, the lower portion 22D of the back cover 22 can be easily pushed out from the mold without impairing the visibility of the main substrate 137 and the dispensing substrate 142 of the back cover 22. FIG.

The extruded portion traces 281b of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22 are arranged on the front end surface of the peripheral edge portion 145 at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction thereof. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is removed from the mold, the front end surface of the peripheral edge portion 145 is pressed in the pushing direction by the pushing portion, so that the peripheral edge portion 145 can be reliably removed from the movable mold.

In this type of game machine 1, molded products such as the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143 are manufactured by an injection molding method in which molten resin is poured into a cavity from a resin pouring portion of a mold. Therefore, if the number of resin pouring parts is increased, the molten resin can be quickly poured into the cavity, which has the advantage of shortening the cycle time during molding of the molded product and enabling efficient production.

However, if the number of resin-injected parts increases in the molded product after molding, traces of resin-injected parts 192 and 252 corresponding to the number of resin-injected parts are formed, and weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, and 251b are generated. . These resin pouring traces 192, 252 and weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, 251b are important specific parts such as board management information display parts 178, 239 displayed on the boards 137, 142 in the board cases 138, 143. , the visibility of the specific portion is reduced, and regardless of whether or not the specific portion is supported, the mechanical strength of the substrate cases 138 and 143 is greatly reduced.

That is, in resin molding, injection molding is a molding method capable of mass-producing moldings with complicated shapes in one process, and the molding process follows the processes of melting, transfer, cooling, and solidification. The traces 192 and 252 of the resin pouring part are traces of the resin pouring part where the molten resin was poured into the cavity of the mold. there is a problem to

The weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, and 251b are a phenomenon that occurs when molten resin is poured into the cavity from the resin pouring portion and when molding a molded product having holes and openings. When the resin merges again, the surface of the molten resin at the merging point is slightly lowered and hardened, so that line-like formation occurs. In the case of the substrate cases 138 and 143, the diffused reflection of light at the locations where the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, and 251b are generated reduces the visibility of specific internal portions, and the tensile impact strength is extremely reduced. It causes a decrease in mechanical strength such as

Therefore, various countermeasures against weld lines have been taken, such as simulating the flow path of the molten resin in the cavity to predict the position where the weld line will occur, or reinforcing the location where the weld line occurs. However, it is difficult to solve the problem of the weld line due to cost and other reasons, and it is one of the important problems common to molded products of home electric appliances and other various products.

In the gaming machine 1 as well, there are things (for example, operation buttons 64 etc.) that are arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 where they can be touched by the player's hands, and those on the back side of the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 that the player can touch. Various molded products are used, such as those that are placed out of reach (for example, the main board case 138, the effect board case 134, the back cover 22, etc.).

Various circuit board cases 138 and 143 are designed to protect the circuit boards 137 and 142 from unauthorized actions, and to facilitate the discovery of any unauthorized actions. However, resin pouring traces 192, 252 and weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, 251b lead to deterioration of visibility inside the substrate cases 138, 143. Also, the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, 251b have the problem of lowering the mechanical strength of the substrate cases 138, 143. FIG.

Even among the boards used in the same gaming machine 1, the main board 137 has a very large effect on the overall game results. The main board case 138 that houses the main board 137 is required to have much higher visibility and mechanical strength than the sub-board cases that house other sub-boards.

Further, even if the position where the weld line is generated can be specified to some extent by simulating the flow path of the molten resin in the cavity, separately molded products such as the substrate cases 138 and 143 and the back cover 22 may overlap. When the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, and 251b of one of the molded products deviate from a specific portion of the substrate, the weld lines 192a, 192b, 251a, and 251b of the other molded product are If it overlaps with the specific part, it cannot be said that the visibility of the specific part is ensured as a result.

In addition to the traces of resin pouring portions 192 and 252, traces of extruded portions are present in the molded product as traces of resin molding at the time of molding. That is, from the viewpoint of ensuring the visibility of a specific portion, when a molded product is pushed out from the movable mold by the pushing portion, the pushing portion traces 281a and 281b formed corresponding to the pushing portion are also the resin pouring portion traces 192, 281b. 252 and the like.

Therefore, when manufacturing various resin parts to be used in the game machine 1, molding is performed while considering the optimum requirements for each resin part. For example, in contrasting the operation button 64, which is a first resin member (cover body) that the player can touch, and the back cover 22, which is a second resin part that the player cannot touch, the operation button 64 is molded. Let N1 (N1≧1) be the number of traces 90 of the resin pouring portion, and N1+n1 (n1≧1) the number of traces 280 of the resin pouring portion when the back cover 22 is molded. Incidentally, the operation button 64 has one resin pouring portion mark 90, and the back cover 22 has about 5 to 10 resin pouring portion marks 280, for example, seven.

In the case of the operation button 64, by pouring the molten resin from one resin pouring portion corresponding to one resin pouring portion trace 90 and molding, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of weld lines, and the resin is poured. Since the number of traces 90 is reduced, it takes time to pour the molten resin, the molding efficiency is lowered, and the manufacturing cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the case of the back cover 22, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 is seven, which is larger than that of the operation button 64. At the time of molding, the seven resin pouring portions corresponding to the resin pouring portion traces 280 are filled with the molten resin. , the molten resin can be easily poured into the cavity, improving the molding efficiency and reducing the manufacturing cost.

In addition, there are many traces 280 of the resin pouring portion, and moreover, due to the occurrence of weld lines 283, etc., the appearance and strength of the back cover 22 after molding are reduced. Since it protects from the back side of the player and is not touched by the player, there is no particular problem with a slight decrease in beauty and strength.

Therefore, it is necessary to consider where the resin members are arranged with respect to the game machine main bodies 2 and 3, such as the operation button 64 that the player can touch and the back cover 22 that the player cannot touch. It is necessary to determine the number of resin-injected parts by using a method that balances beauty, strength, and molding efficiency.

The operation button 64 includes a body portion 68 provided with a portion that inhibits the flow of the molten resin, and an operation portion 70 that is continuously formed on the upper end side of the body portion 68. A trace 90 of a resin pouring portion is arranged on the back side where there is no resin. The flow-inhibiting portions are formed by a pair of cutouts 68a that are arranged on the left and right sides of the body portion 68 so as to face each other in the radial direction, and that are recessed from the edge of the body portion 68 toward the operation portion 70 side. there is

The board case employed in the gaming machine 1 includes, for example, a main board case (first board case) 138 that houses a main board 137 for controlling game motions, and a performance board for controlling performance motions that is separate from the main board 137. There is an effect board case (second board case) 134 that accommodates 133 . Taking this main board case 138 and effect board case 134 as an example, the number of resin pouring portion traces 192 and 207 will be considered.

The first case body 180 of the main board case 138 has a resin pouring portion mark 192 as shown in FIG. There is a trace 207. Assuming that the number of resin pouring portion marks 192 of the main board case 138 is N2 (N2≧1) (for example, two), the number of resin pouring portion marks 207 of the effect board case 134 is N2+n2 (n2≧0). ) pieces (for example, three pieces). Therefore, the number of resin pouring portion marks 192 and 207 on the main board case 138 and the effect board case 134 are the same, or the number of the resin pouring portion marks 207 on the effect board case 134 is the same as the number of the resin pouring portion marks 192 on the main board case 138. is n2 (n2≧1) more than the number of .

When the main board case 138 and the effect board case 134 are molded by injection molding, the traces 192, 207 of the resin pouring parts and the weld lines 192a, 192b, 208a, 208b reduce the visibility inside the board cases 134, 138. In addition, the weld lines 192a, 192b, 208a, 208b have the problem of lowering the mechanical strength of the substrate cases 134, 138. However, even among the boards used in the same game machine 1, the main board 137 has a very large effect on the overall game results. The main board case 138 housing the main board 137 is required to have much higher visibility and mechanical strength than the effect board case 134 housing the effect board 133. It will be.

Therefore, the number of resin pouring portion traces 192 during molding of the main board case 138 is set to N2 (N2≧1), which is less than the number N2+n2 (n2≧0) of the resin pouring portion traces 207 during molding of the effect substrate case 134. By using one, for example, two, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the visibility and mechanical strength of the main circuit board case 138 side. Also, by setting the number of resin pouring traces 207 at the time of molding the effect board case 134 to N2+n2 (n2≧0), the visibility and mechanical strength of the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 side are somewhat reduced. However, the molten resin can be easily poured into the cavity, the molding efficiency is improved, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition to the resin pouring portion trace 192 of the main substrate case 138 and the resin pouring portion trace 207 of the effect substrate case 134, the resin pouring portion trace 192 of the main substrate case 138 and the resin pouring portion trace 217 of the liquid crystal substrate case 136 are also shown. It is also possible to implement the relationship with .

When looking at the relative positions of the back surfaces of the main board case 138, the effect board case 134, and the liquid crystal board case 136 in the front-rear direction, the back surfaces of the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 are at substantially the same position. The rear surface of the protrudes rearward from the effect board case 134 and the like. That is, the back surface of the rear wall portion 180a of the main board case 138 protrudes further to the rear than the back surfaces of the rear wall portions 201a of the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, as long as the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22 corresponding to each of the substrate cases 134, 136, 138 is substantially flat, the distance between the rear surface of the main substrate case 138 and the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22 is the effect substrate case 134. , the distance between the rear surface of the liquid crystal substrate case 136 and the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22 .

In this way, even when each board case 134, 136, 138 side is seen through the back surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22, the visibility of the inside of the main board case 138 is improved. The visibility of the inside of the case 136 is improved compared to that. Incidentally, the amount of rearward protrusion of the main board case 138, the effect board case 134, and the liquid crystal board case 136 may be substantially the same.

In the resin back cover 22 that protects the main board case 138, the effect board case 134, and the liquid crystal board case 136, as shown in FIG. Assuming that area 1 is area 1 and the area overlapping effect substrate case 134 and liquid crystal substrate case 136 in upper part 22U of back cover 22 is area 2, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in the first area is N3 (N3≧ 1) It is desirable to set the number (for example, 2) and set the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in the second region to N3+n3 (n3≧1) (for example, 5). It is desirable that the first area and the second area of the back cover 22 have approximately the same area and volume.

In this way, visibility through the back cover 22 is improved in the first region overlapping the portion below the main board case 138, and the second region overlapping the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136. Even when a large number of heat radiation holes 264 are arranged in the cavity, the molded portion of the heat radiation holes 264 does not impede the flow of the molten resin in the cavity and lower the molding efficiency of the back cover 22.例文帳に追加

When the rear cover 22 is molded, a plurality of first extrusions are arranged corresponding to the traces 281a of the first extrusions of the rear surface portion 144 of the rear cover 22, and the second extrusions of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the rear cover 22 are arranged. A movable mold is used in which a plurality of second extruding portions are arranged corresponding to the marks 281b. When the rear cover 22 after molding is pushed out, the first and second push-out portions of the movable mold side are brought into contact with the rear surface portion 144 and the peripheral edge portion 145 of the rear cover 22, respectively. The extruding parts are simultaneously moved with the same stroke in the extruding direction to extrude the resin part. Therefore, on the rear cover 22 after molding, traces of the first extruded portion 281a and traces of the second extruded portion 281b are left at a plurality of locations corresponding to the respective extruded portions.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 40, the first extruded trace 281a on the rear surface 144, which facilitates securing the contact area of the first extruded portion, is formed in a circular shape having a large area, thereby securing the contact area of the second extruded portion. The second extruded portion trace 281b of the peripheral edge portion 145, which is easy to remove, has a semicircular shape with a small area. The back cover 22 can be pushed out by a push-out portion of suitable shape and size.

Further, when the surface area of the back cover 22 is divided into a heat radiation area 264A in which a plurality of heat radiation holes 264 are arranged and a non-heat radiation area 264B other than the heat radiation area 264A, the heat radiation area 264A and the non-heat radiation area 264B Since the degree of adhesion of the back cover 22 to the movable mold varies greatly, the number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b of the non-heat-dissipating region 264B with a small degree of adhesion is changed according to the difference in the degree of adhesion of the back cover 22 to the movable mold. It is assumed that the number is N5 (N5≧1), and the number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b of the heat dissipation region 264A with a high degree of adhesion is N5+n5 (n5≧1).

For example, in the heat radiation area 264A of the rear cover 22, the N5+n5 (n5≧1) extruded portion traces 281a and 281b are distributed substantially evenly between the heat radiation holes 264 of the rear surface portion 144, so that the heat radiation holes 264 Although a large extrusion resistance is generated by the molded portion of , the heat radiation area 264A side of the back cover 22 can be pushed out against the extrusion resistance.

On the other hand, the number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b in the non-radiating region 264B is N5 (N5≧1), which is smaller than the number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b on the side of the heat dissipating region 264A. Since the rear surface portion 144 has an opening to some extent and is mostly flat and has a low pushing resistance, visibility with respect to the main circuit board case 138 is also improved.

The back cover 22 has a back part 144 that protects the back members such as the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 from the back side, and a peripheral part 145 that bends forward from the outer circumference of the back part 144 to protect the back members from the outside. It has When molding such a back cover 22 as well, it is molded by pouring molten resin into the cavity from the resin pouring portion in the same manner as other back parts.

The back cover 22 is attached to the left and right attachment portions 20a and 20b of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3, but the front and back positions of the attachment portions 20a and 20b are different on the left and right due to the relative relationship with the back member and other peripheral members. For these reasons, the back cover 22 itself often has a left-right asymmetrical structure. Therefore, when arranging the resin-injecting portion in the molding die for the back cover 22, the left and right volume ratios of the left and right curved portions 145a and 145b of the peripheral edge portion 145 are taken into account. The resin pouring part is arranged so that the circulation of the molten resin becomes substantially uniform.

That is, when looking at the surface area of the back cover 22, as shown in FIG. 40, a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, for example, a first area having a large volume ( anti-hinge side portion 22R) and a second region (hinge side portion 22L) smaller in volume than the first region, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 at the time of molding in the second region is N6 (N6 ≧1), and the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 at the time of molding in the first region is assumed to be N6+n6 (n6≧1).

By allocating the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in consideration of the volume ratio between the first region and the second region in this way, the circulation of the molten resin in the entire cavity becomes substantially uniform. The molding efficiency in molding is improved, and the strength of a portion of the back cover 22 is prevented from being excessively lowered.

Note that the traces 280 of the resin pouring portion may be arranged on both the back surface portion 144 and the bent portions 145a and 145b of the back cover 22, but are preferably arranged on the back surface portion 144. FIG. In the case of the back cover 22 having bent portions 145a and 145b on both left and right sides of the back portion 144, generally the bent portion 145a in the first region protrudes longer than the bent portion 145b in the second region. However, it is the same even when the size of the volume is caused by a factor other than the projection length. The back cover 22 has one of the bent portions 145a and 145b attached to the game machine main bodies 2 and 3 by the third hinge means 21 so as to be openable and closable. Stop at game machine bodies 2 and 3.

A substrate (first member) 137 on which electronic components 174 are mounted and having a specific portion such as a component information display portion 179, and a resin substrate case (first member) that protects the substrate 137 so that the specific portion on the substrate 137 side can be visually recognized. 2 member) 138, and a through hole such as a heat dissipation hole 183 in a region of the board case 138 corresponding to the board 137. In order to ensure visibility of a specific portion of the board 137, the The specific portion must be arranged at a position that does not overlap with the through holes, weld lines 192a and 192b, traces of the resin pouring portion 192, and traces of the extrusion portion.

Further, in the substrate case 138 that houses the substrate 137 on which the electronic components 174 are mounted and the back cover (second member) 22 that protects the substrate case 138, the substrate case 138 has a plurality of heat dissipation holes (through holes) 183. The same is true when there is

If there are small through holes, weld lines 192a, 192b, traces of resin pouring portion 192, traces of extruded portion, etc. in the substrate case 138 and the back cover 22, the visibility of the specific portion is reduced because light is diffusely reflected at these portions. In addition, if there is a through hole such as the heat radiation hole 183, a weld line 192a is generated downstream of the heat radiation hole 183 during molding of the substrate case 138 and the back cover 22. The weld line 192a makes it difficult to see a specific portion, resulting in poor visibility. decreases. Therefore, from the viewpoint of ensuring the visibility of the specific portion on the substrate 137 side, the specific portion overlaps with the substrate case 138, the through hole of the back cover 22, the weld lines 192a and 192b, the traces of the resin pouring portion 192, and the traces of the extrusion portion. It is desirable to place it in a position where

In the case where a back member including a substrate case 138 that houses the substrate 137 and a resin back cover 22 that protects the back member so that the back member can be seen, the back cover 22 is used to ensure the visibility of a specific portion. It is necessary to arrange the traces of the resin molded part provided at the time of molding at a position that does not overlap with the specific part. For example, in the relationship between the first board case 138 that houses the main board 137 for controlling game operations and the back cover 22 that overlaps the first board case 138, the trace of the resin molding part of the back cover 22 is the first It is desirable to arrange it at a position not overlapping with the board case 138 . Traces of a resin molding portion at the time of molding include traces of a resin pouring portion 192 and traces of an extrusion portion.

When the back member including the first board case 138 that houses the main board 137 and the resin back cover 22 that visually covers the back member are provided, and the board management information display section 178 is provided on the main board 137, In order to ensure the visibility of the board management information display section 178 , it is necessary to arrange the traces of the resin molding portion at the time of molding the back cover 22 at a position not overlapping the board management information display section 178 .

Even if the back cover 22 overlaps the first board case 138 , the trace of the resin molding part of the back cover 22 is arranged at a position not overlapping the board management information display section 178 . The back cover 22 may be provided with an opening for viewing the substrate management information display portion 178 .

Figures 45-47 illustrate a second embodiment of the invention. The third hinge means 21 includes a hinge shaft 147 provided integrally with the bent portion side of the back cover 22, and a side wall portion 18 of the back protection portion 14 on the inner frame 3 side, which is provided integrally with the hinge shaft 147 facing upward. and a hinge bearing 148 that is detachably received.

The outer peripheral surface of the hinge shaft 147 is generally circular as a whole, and a circular shape having approximately the same diameter as the insertion head 166 is formed on the intermediate side between the insertion head 166 at the lower end and the support base 165 at the upper end. Between the insertion head 166 and the reinforcing portion 286 and between the reinforcing portion 286 and the support base 165, a concave portion 167 having a substantially U-shaped cross section is provided. As in the first embodiment, the recess 167 is radially recessed from the front side of the hinge shaft 147 and is elongated in the vertical axial direction toward the reinforcing portions 286 on both upper and lower sides.

The hinge bearing 148 includes a substantially U-shaped outer periphery holding portion 287 in plan view that holds the hinge shaft 147 on the side of the reinforcement portion 286 , and an outer periphery holding portion 287 provided on both upper and lower sides of the outer periphery holding portion 287 and arranged in front of the hinge shaft 147 . An arc-shaped front holding portion 288 is provided, and the outer peripheral holding portion 287 and the front holding portion 288 cooperate to hold the hinge shaft 147 rotatably. Note that if the outer peripheral holding portion 287 has a tubular shape sufficient to hold the hinge shaft 147, the front holding portion 288 is unnecessary. The stepped portion 289 of the hinge bearing 148 receives the support base portion 165 on the hinge shaft 147 side. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment.

Even when forming the concave portion 167 on the hinge shaft 147 to eliminate the molding distortion, in addition to the insertion head portion 166 on the lower end side, one or more reinforcing portions 286 are provided in the vertical direction on the intermediate side. , the outer circumference of the hinge shaft 147 can be configured substantially circular. Therefore, even in the hinge shaft 147 which is substantially circular or can be identified as substantially circular, it is possible to provide the concave portion 167 to absorb the molding distortion.

Figures 48-50 illustrate a third embodiment of the invention. The third hinge means 21 includes a hinge shaft 147 provided integrally with the bent portion 145a side of the back cover 22, and a side wall portion 18a of the back protection portion 14 on the inner frame 3 side. A hinge bearing 148 is detachably received in the hinge shaft 147 and a restricting means 149 for the back cover 22 is provided between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 .

The hinge shaft 147 protrudes downward from the support base 165, and the portion excluding the insertion head 166 on the lower end side and the reinforcing portion 286 between the insertion head 166 and the support base 165 has a cross-shaped cross section. Between the insertion head portion 166 and the reinforcing portion 286 and between the reinforcing portion 286 and the support base portion 165, vertical concave portions 167 are provided.

Accordingly, the hinge shaft 147 has a substantially circular outer peripheral surface including the insertion head 166 and the reinforcing portion 286, and has four concave portions 167 on both upper and lower sides of the reinforcing portion 286 in the circumferential direction. It is formed vertically.

The hinge bearing 148 has a pair of left and right holding members 290 projecting rearward from the support base 169 of the side wall portion 18a of the back protection portion 14, and the hinge shaft 147 can be rotated and inserted/removed between the left and right holding members 290. It is designed to hold

The regulating means 149 includes a regulating portion 291 formed on the lower surface of one of the holding members 290 on the hinge bearing 148 side, a regulating protrusion 292 projecting radially from the hinge shaft 147 below the regulating portion 291, A notch-shaped releasing portion 293 is formed between the rear end portions of the holding member 290 so that the restricting protrusion 292 can pass vertically.

Therefore, the restricting means 149 restricts the upward movement of the restricting projection 292 with the restricting portion 291 on the lower side of the hinge bearing 148 until the back cover 22 is opened from the closed state to the mounting position 22B. 22 is opened at a predetermined angle to the attachment/detachment position 22B, the restriction of the restriction projection 292 by the restriction portion 291 is released, and the restriction projection 292 corresponds to the release portion 293 between the left and right holding members 290. to the upper side.

When the hinge shaft 147 is provided with the concave portion 167 to absorb the molding distortion, the hinge shaft 147 may be formed in a cross-shaped cross section and provided with a plurality of concave portions 167 in the circumferential direction. It is also possible to provide a reinforcing portion 286 in the middle of the hinge shaft 147 and to make the outer peripheral shape other than the reinforcing portion 286 a substantially perfect circle or a shape that can be identified with a substantially perfect circle.

Further, by providing the hinge shaft 147 with the restricting protrusion 292 and providing the hinge bearing 148 with the restricting portion 291 and the releasing portion 293, the restricting means 149 can be incorporated into the third hinge means 21 . In this restricting means 149, the restricting portion 291 of the hinge bearing 148 restricts the upward movement of the restricting protrusion 292 of the hinge shaft 147 until the back cover 22 is opened at a predetermined angle, and the hinge shaft 147 is moved upward from the hinge bearing 148. The back cover 22 cannot be removed by pulling it out. However, if the back cover 22 is opened at a predetermined angle, the restricting protrusion 292 of the hinge shaft 147 corresponds to the releasing part 293 of the hinge bearing 148, and the restricting protrusion 292 can pass through the releasing part 293. 22 can be removed. When attaching the back cover 22, the steps may be performed in the reverse order.

Figures 51-56 illustrate a fourth embodiment of the invention. 51 to 54, the third hinge means 21 consists of a hinge shaft 147 provided integrally with the bent portion 145a side of the back cover 22, and a side wall portion 18a of the back protection portion 14 on the inner frame 3 side. A hinge bearing 148 is provided integrally and receives the hinge shaft 147 so as to be detachably inserted upward.

Further, each of the plurality of third hinge means 21 in the vertical direction is provided with a first regulation mechanism between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 to regulate removal of the back cover 22 within a first regulation range 294A near the closed position 22A. means 294 and a second restricting means 295 restricting removal of the back cover 22 in a second restricting range 295A far from the closed position 22A. It is sufficient that the first restricting means 294 and the second restricting means 295 are provided in at least one third hinge means 21 among the plurality of third hinge means 21 in the vertical direction.

The hinge shaft 147 has an insertion head 166 on the lower end side and a recess 167 vertically formed between the insertion head 166 and the support base 165, as in the second embodiment. The hinge bearing 148 includes a first receiving portion 296a that receives the hinge shaft 147 from the front side, and a second receiving portion 296b that is provided between the first receiving portions 296a and receives the hinge shaft 147 from the rear side.

The first restricting means 294 includes a restricting portion 291 provided on the upper side of the support base portion 165, and a restricting protrusion 292 provided on the hinge bearing 148 side above the restricting portion 291, so that the back cover 22 is in the closed position. Within the first restriction range 294A from 22A to the first position 22a, the restriction protrusion 292 restricts the upward movement of the restriction part 291, and when the rear cover 22 is opened beyond the first restriction range 294A, the restriction protrusion 292 restricts. It is deviated from the part 291 to release the regulation. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is opened within the first restriction range 294A, the back cover 22 cannot be removed due to the restriction of the first restriction means 294. It is necessary to open the regulatory range of 294A or more.

Even after the regulation is released by the first regulation means 294, in the second regulation range 295A from the second position 22b to the third position 22c in the vicinity of the first position 22a, the major axis of the hinge shaft 147 of the second regulation means 295 Since the portion 147A comes into contact with the first receiving portion 296a and the second receiving portion 296b of the hinge bearing 148 to restrict relative sliding between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 in the vertical direction, the second restricting means Due to the regulating action of 295, it is possible to prevent the back cover 22 from unintentionally falling off due to unstable rotation of the back cover 22 around the hinge shaft 147 and removal of the hinge shaft 147. FIG.

That is, when the back cover 22 is in the second regulation range 295A, the major diameter portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 is, as shown in FIG. It is approximately the same as the minimum spacing 296A or slightly larger than the minimum spacing 296A. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is opened up to the second regulation range 295A, the sliding portions at both ends of the long diameter portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 are not in contact with the first receiving portion 296a and the second receiving portion 296b of the hinge bearing 148. Since the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 slide relatively around the hinge shaft 147 while coming into contact with the slidable portion and resisting the frictional resistance thereof, the vertical movement of the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 is prevented. This restricts relative sliding.

The short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 has a smaller diameter than the minimum distance 296A of the hinge bearing 148, and the rear cover 22 is opened from the first regulation range 294A to the second regulation range 295A, and the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 is opened. At the position where the radial portion 147B corresponds to the minimum spacing 296A of the hinge bearing 148, the hinge shaft 147 is vertically inserted into and removed from the hinge bearing 148 to attach and detach the back cover 22. As shown in FIG.

In the second restricting means 295, the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 are tightened in the second restricting range 295A, and the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 are loosened outside the second restricting range 295A to allow play. . Therefore, the degree of tightening of the third hinge means 21 is different between the second regulation range 295A and the rest. The means 21 are designed not to come off.

Therefore, when performing maintenance or the like with the rear cover 22 opened to the second regulation range 295A in FIG. Since the frictional resistance between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 is large, it is possible to prevent the hinge shaft 147 from slipping out of the hinge bearing 148 and the rear cover 22 from unexpectedly falling off.

Further, when the back cover 22 is opened from the first regulation range 294A to the second regulation range 295A, the second regulation means 295 increases the frictional resistance between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148, thereby resisting the frictional resistance. Since the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 slide relative to each other about the shaft center, it is possible to prevent the back cover 22 in the opened state from rotating unstably about the third hinge means 21 .

When attaching the rear cover, the hinge shaft 147 may be inserted into the hinge bearing 148 at the open position where the rear cover 22 is separated from the first regulation range 294A and the second regulation range 295A. In this open position, the hinge shaft 147 can be easily inserted into the hinge bearing 148 because the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 corresponds to the minimum spacing 296A of the hinge bearing 148 .

Further, after the hinge shaft 146 is inserted into the hinge bearing 148, if the rear cover 22 is rotated to the closed position 22A, the sliding portion of the long diameter portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 is moved by the second restricting means 295 to the hinge bearing 148. , and rotates against the frictional resistance between them corresponding to the slidable portion of the minimum distance 296A. As a result, when the rear cover 22 rotates to the closed position 22A around the third hinge means 21 within the second regulation range 295A, the vertical movement of the rear cover 22 due to the play between the hinge shaft 147 and the hinge bearing 148 is prevented. Direction rattling can be prevented.

Therefore, even though the back cover 22 is rotated from the second restricting range 295A to the closed position 22A via the first restricting range 294A, the back cover 22 is closer to the closed position than when the second restricting means 295 is not provided. When reaching 22A, latch means 24 can be positioned at or near mounting hole 153. FIG. Therefore, even if the back cover 22 is relatively lacking in rigidity, the latch means 24 can be easily fitted to the mounting hole 153 .

It is also possible to omit the first restricting means 294 and provide a second restricting range 295A in which the second restricting means 295 exhibits the restricting function up to or near the closed position 22A. In this case, the second restricting means 295 functions up to or near the closed position 22A to restrict rattling of the third hinge means 21, so that the positioning of the latch means 24 with respect to the mounting hole 153 is further facilitated.

In addition, the major diameter portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 may be approximately the same as the interval 296A of the hinge bearing 148, or may be slightly larger or smaller than the interval 296A. If the major diameter portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 is slightly larger than the interval 296A, the hinge shaft 147 and/or the hinge bearing 148 may be configured to be elastically deformable in the tightening direction. The first restricted range 294A and the second restricted range 295A may partially overlap, or there may be some gap between the first restricted range 294A and the second restricted range 295A.

For example, since the hinge shaft 147 has a U-shaped cross section due to the concave portion 167 for the purpose of absorbing molding strain, the thickness of the hinge shaft 147 having a U-shaped cross section can be adjusted appropriately. An appropriate elastic force can be imparted to the character-shaped open end side. Further, by appropriately adjusting the thickness of the U-shaped second receiving portion 296b of the hinge bearing 148, the hinge bearing 148 can be given an appropriate elastic force in the front-rear direction.

Figures 57-61 illustrate a fifth embodiment of the present invention. The plurality of third hinge means 21 in the vertical direction, as shown in FIGS. A hinge bearing 148 is provided on the back protection portion 14 side of the inner frame 3 and receives the hinge shaft 147 detachably in its radial direction.

As shown in FIG. 61, the hinge shaft 147 is provided with a concave portion 167 between the upper and lower support bases 165, and has an elliptical shape with a U-shaped cross section in which a major diameter portion 147A and a minor diameter portion 147B are formed perpendicularly. is. A reinforcing portion 286 that also serves as a guide is provided in the intermediate portion of the hinge shaft 147 in a direction that traverses the concave portion 167 .

The hinge bearing 148 has a pair of left and right bearing projections 297 projecting rearward from the back protection portion 14 side of the inner frame 3, and a pair of upper and lower connecting portions 298 connecting the upper and lower ends of the bearing projections 297 to the left and right. The upper and lower connecting portions 298 are provided with first receiving portions 298a for holding the hinge shaft 147 from the front side, and the left and right bearing protrusions 297 are provided with second receiving portions 298b for holding the hinge shaft 147 from the left and right sides. An insertion/removal portion 299 that allows the hinge shaft 147 to be inserted/removed in the front-rear direction is provided between the rear end portions of the bearing protrusions 297 .

A space 297A between the rear end portions of the left and right bearing protrusions 297, that is, the lateral width of the insertion/removal portion 299, is slightly smaller than the dimension of the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147, and the rear end portions of the left and right bearing protrusions 297 By elastically deforming one or both of the end portions outward in the left-right direction, the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 can pass through the insertion/removal portion 299 back and forth.

Note that the insertion/removal portion 299 may have the same dimensions as the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147. As shown in FIG. The vertical width of the bearing protrusion 297 is slightly smaller than the interval between the support bases 165, and the relative vertical movement of the third hinge means 21 is restricted between the bearing protrusion 297 and the upper and lower support bases 165. ing.

With the third hinge means 21 having such a structure, when the rear cover 22 is attached via the third hinge means 21, the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 is inserted into and removed from the hinge bearing 148 as shown in FIG. After matching the portion 299, the hinge shaft 147 side is pressed toward the inner frame 3 side in that state. Then, the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 elastically deforms the rear ends of the left and right bearing protrusions 297 of the hinge bearing 148 outward, so that the distance between the rear ends of the left and right bearing protrusions 297 widens. The portion 147B passes through the insertion/removal portion 299 and enters between the left and right bearing projections 297, and the left and right bearing projections 297 hold the hinge shaft 147 so as to be rotatable.

A concave portion 167 is formed in the hinge shaft 147 in order to prevent distortion during molding. Also when the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 passes between the rear ends of the left and right bearing protrusions 297, the rear end corresponding to the open end side of the recess 167 may get caught in the recess 167. Without this, the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 can quickly pass between the rear end portions of the left and right bearing protrusions 297 .

After the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 passes through the insertion/removal portion 299 and enters between the left and right bearing protrusions 297, when the rear cover 22 is rotated around the hinge shaft 147, the long diameter portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 is moved. correspond to the left and right bearing protrusions 297 , the hinge shaft 147 does not come off the hinge bearing 148 .

In particular, the hinge shaft 147 has a substantially U-shaped cross section due to the concave portion 167. Since there is a reinforcing portion 286 in the middle of the concave portion 167, an external force in the direction of compression is applied to the long diameter portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147. Even if this happens, the longer diameter portion 147A of the hinge shaft 147 corresponding to the reinforcing portion 286 will not be elastically deformed in the compression direction. Therefore, even though the hinge shaft 147 has the concave portion 167 , the hinge shaft 147 does not unexpectedly drop out of the hinge bearing 148 .

When removing the back cover 22, the back cover 22 is opened rearward, the short diameter portion 147B of the hinge shaft 147 is aligned with the insertion/removal portion 299 of the hinge bearing 148, and in this state, the back cover 22 is pulled rearward. Then, the left and right bearing protrusions 297 are elastically deformed outward and the hinge shaft 147 is disengaged from the hinge bearing 148, so that the back cover 22 can be easily removed.

In this manner, both upper and lower sides of the hinge shaft 147 can be supported by the support base 165 in a double-supported manner. When the back cover 22 is attached to the game machine main bodies 2 and 3, a plurality of third hinge means 21 are arranged in the vertical direction. Alternatively, as exemplified in the first embodiment, the third hinge means 21 other than one may be of a type that can be inserted and removed from the upper side.

In addition, in the case where the hinge shaft 147 is provided with the concave portion 167 to prevent molding distortion while increasing the diameter of the hinge shaft 147, it is generally appropriate to arrange one concave portion 167 in the circumferential direction. It is also possible to arrange a plurality of them in the circumferential direction. Further, when the concave portion 167 is provided in the hinge shaft 147, the hinge shaft 147 generally has a substantially oval shape having a major diameter portion 147A and a minor diameter portion 147B. It may be configured in a substantially perfect circular shape. Further, when the hinge shaft 147 is provided with a major diameter portion 147A and a minor diameter portion 147B, the outer peripheral shape of the hinge shaft 147 may be substantially oval, substantially elliptical, substantially perfect circular, rounded triangular, It may be rectangular or the like.

a first restricting means 294 for restricting the removal of the back cover 22 until it is opened at a first angle of a predetermined angle; A second restricting means 295 is provided for restricting the accidental dropout of 22 .

The hinge shaft 147 has a recess 167 between the insertion head 166 and the support base 165 as in the first embodiment. It has a U-shaped oval shape. The hinge bearing 148 includes a pair of upper and lower first receiving portions 296a that receive the hinge shaft 147 from the front side, and a second receiving portion 296b that is provided between the first receiving portions 296a and receives the hinge shaft 147 from the rear side. The first receiving portion 296a and the second receiving portion 296b support the entire periphery of the hinge shaft 147 so as to be rotatable and insertable/removable.

The first restricting means 294 includes a restricting portion 291 provided on the upper side of the support base portion 165, and a restricting protrusion 292 provided on the hinge bearing 148 side above the restricting portion 291, and the back cover 22 is closed. to a first angle of a predetermined angle, the restricting projection 292 restricts the upward movement of the restricting portion 291, and when the back cover 22 is opened to the first angle or more, the restricting projecting portion 292 disengages from the restricting portion 291. The regulation has been lifted. Therefore, until the back cover 22 is opened at the first angle or more, the back cover 22 cannot be removed due to the restriction of the first restricting means 294. Therefore, when the back cover 22 is to be removed, the back cover 22 must be opened at the first angle. It is necessary to open more than the angle.

FIG. 62 illustrates a sixth embodiment of the invention. In this embodiment, the back cover 22 does not overlap the main board case 138 (first board case), the payout board case 143 and the power supply board case 141 arranged below it, and is positioned above the main board case 138. It is designed to overlap and protect the back members such as the effect board case 134 (second board case) and the liquid crystal board case 136 (second board case) arranged on the left and right.

In such a back cover 22 as well, traces 280 of a resin pouring portion and traces 281 of an extruding portion, which are traces of a resin molded portion during molding, are formed. However, if the rear cover 22 does not overlap the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143, the main board 137 in the main board case 138 and the payout board 142 in the payout board case 143 have specific parts to be visually recognized. However, the traces 280 of the resin pouring portion and traces 281 of the extrusion portion of the main board case 138 and the payout board case 143 should be prevented from overlapping with the specific portion.

On the other hand, when the back cover 22 overlaps the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, the effect board 133 in the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board 135 in the liquid crystal board case 136 are required to be visible from the outside. If there is a board management number or other specific parts, it is necessary to arrange the traces of the resin pouring part 280 and the traces of the extrusion part 281 at positions that do not overlap with the specific parts.

The rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 has a heat radiation area 264A having a plurality of heat radiation holes 264 on the upper side thereof, and a flat non-heat radiation area 264B on the lower side of the heat radiation area 264A. Specific parts such as a board control number are arranged on the effect board 133 in the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board 135 in the liquid crystal board case 136 in the part corresponding to the non-radiating area 264B of the back cover 22 .

The traces 280 of the resin pouring portion and the traces 281 of the extrusion portion of the back cover 22 are dispersedly arranged on the back portion 144 . On the heat radiation area 264A side, a large number of traces 280 of resin pouring portions and traces of extrusion portions 281 are arranged so as to be positioned between the heat radiation holes 264 in a dispersed manner. A smaller number of resin pouring portion traces 280 and extruding portion traces 281 are arranged on the non-heat radiation region 264B side than on the heat radiation region 264A side. It is arranged at a position that does not overlap with at least a specific portion such as the component information display section 179 on the main substrate 137 side, such as being arranged in the peripheral portion of the heat dissipation area 264B.

The number of resin pouring portion traces 192 on the main board case 138 is N2 (N2≧1), for example, one or two, and the number of resin pouring portion traces 90 at the time of molding the back cover 22 is N2+n4 (n4≧1). ) pieces, for example, about 4 to 6 pieces. Of course, the trace 192 of the resin pouring portion of the main board case 138 is arranged so as not to overlap a specific portion of the main board 137 , such as by arranging it in the peripheral portion of the main board case 138 .

When the number of resin pouring portion marks 192 on the main board case 138 is N2 (N2≧1), the number of resin pouring portion marks 207, 217 on the side of the effect board case 134 and/or the liquid crystal board case 136 is N2+n2. (n2≧0) is desirable.

In this way, even if there is a specific part on the effect board 133 side in the effect board case 134 and a specific part on the liquid crystal board 135 side in the liquid crystal board case 136, the specific part can be displayed through the back cover 22. visibility can be ensured.

Further, the main board case 138 is separated from the rear cover 22, and the main board case 138 is not protected by the rear cover 22. , the number N2+n4 (n4≧1) of the resin pouring portion traces 90 on the back cover 22, so the number of weld lines generated is also less than on the back cover 22, and the strength of the main circuit board case 138 is ensured. can be done.

FIG. 63 illustrates a seventh embodiment of the invention. Between the back cover 22 side and the inner frame 3 side of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, a first restricting means 294 and a second restricting means 295 are provided.

The first restricting means 294 restricts removal of the back cover 22 when the back cover 22 is in the vicinity of the closed position 22A between the closed position 22A and the first position 22a. It is composed of a guide rail 49 arranged near the upper side of the back cover 22 and protruding rearward from the back cover 22, and the regulation is released when the back cover 22 is opened beyond the first position 22a. there is

The second restricting means 295 restricts removal of the back cover 22 when the back cover 22 is between the closed position 22A and the second position 22b. 292 and a support base 165 provided on the side of the hinge shaft 147 on the lower side of the regulating projection 292 so as to release the regulation when the back cover 22 is opened beyond the second position 22b. It's becoming

When removing the back cover 22, the latch means 24 is released to open the back cover 22 rearward around the third hinge means 21 until it passes the second position 22b. The hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 can be removed from the hinge bearing 148 .

However, even if the back cover 22 is opened, if the back cover 22 is located closer to the closed position 22A than the first position 22a, the first restricting means 294 is positioned above the back cover 22 even if the back cover 22 is lifted. and the second restricting means 295 on the side of the third hinge means 21 , the back cover 22 cannot be lifted until the hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 is disengaged from the hinge bearing 148 .

Since the first restricting means 294 and the second restricting means 295 cooperate to restrict the removal of the back cover 22 while the back cover 22 is on the closed position 22A side rather than the first position 22a, only one of them can be closed. In comparison with the case of regulating with , the load on each of the first regulating means 294 and the second regulating means 295 can be reduced.

When the back cover 22 is opened beyond the first position 22a, the back cover 22 is released from the guide rail 49 of the first restricting means 294. The second restricting means 295 restricts removal of the back cover 22 until the cover 22 passes over the second position 22b. If it is opened beyond the second position 22b, the regulation of the rear cover 22 by the second regulation means 295 is released, so that the rear cover 22 can be lifted upward, and the hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 is lifted. can be removed from the hinge bearing 148 to remove the back cover 22 .

Figures 64-67 illustrate an eighth embodiment of the invention. In this eighth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the first hinge means 6 for pivoting the inner frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the back cover 22 pivoting to the inner frame 3 are provided. and the third hinge means 21 are arranged on the same side in the left-right direction.

In this way, when the first hinge means 6 and the third hinge means 21 are arranged on the same side in the left-right direction, the inner frame 3 is placed on the side of the island facility 150 of the game hall in a state where the game machine 1 is installed. When the rear cover 22 is opened around the first hinge means 6 and then opened around the third hinge means 21, the rear cover 22 opens to approach the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the back side of the game machine 1 is largely opened to the side of the passage between the island facilities 150, so that work such as maintenance and inspection can be easily performed.

The back protection portion 14 on the back side of the inner frame 3 has right and left attachment portions 20a and 20b of approximately the same height at the rear ends of the side wall portions 18a and 18b. , the extension mounting portion 300 is provided with the dispensing means 23, the ball supply passage 51, etc., and the back cover 22 is pivotally connected to the first hinge means 6 via a pair of upper and lower third hinge means 21 so as to be openable and closable. A rear cover 22 is fixed via a latch means 24 to the mounting portion 20a on the opposite side.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the back cover 22 includes a back portion 144 that protects the back parts such as the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, etc. It has a peripheral edge portion 145 which is formed in a curved shape on the front side and protects the back parts such as the effect board case 134 and the main board case 138 from the outer peripheral side.

Of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22, the curved portion 145a on the side opposite to the first hinge means 6 has a greater forward bending length than the curved portion 145b on the first hinge means 6 side, When fixed by the latch means 24, the front end of the bent portion 145a contacts the mounting portion 20a.

In addition, in the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22, the upper side corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 is a heat dissipation area 264A having a plurality of heat dissipation holes 264, and the lower part corresponding to the main board case 138. The side is a flat non-porous non-heat-dissipating area 264B. A plurality of traces of resin pouring portions 280 and traces of extrusion portions 281 are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to be located between the heat radiation holes 264 on the heat radiation region 264A side. Further, on the non-radiating region 264B side, a smaller number of resin pouring portion traces 280 and extruding portion traces 281 are arranged than on the heat radiating region 264A side. It is arranged at a position that does not overlap with at least a specific portion such as the opening history indicating means 184 of the main substrate 137, such as being arranged in the peripheral portion of the region 264B.

The trace 280 of the resin pouring portion of the back cover 22 has about 3 to 5 heat dissipating regions 264A including the vicinity of the non heat dissipating regions 264B, and the number of the non heat dissipating regions 264B including the vicinity of the heat dissipating regions 264A. About one or two. When the distribution of traces of the resin-injected portions in the first region 22D on the side of the third hinge means 21 and the second region 22U on the side opposite to the back cover 22 is observed with reference to the central line of the center of the rear cover 22, the molding die In order to make the circulation of the molten resin substantially uniform in the cavity for the rear cover 22, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 on the side of the second region 22U having a long bending length and a large volume of the bending portion 145a is The bending length of the portion 145b is greater than the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 on the side of the second region 22U having a short and small volume.

Further, when the component information display portion 179 of the integrated circuit device 174 of the main substrate 137 is defined as a specific portion, the weld line 283 generated between the vertically adjacent resin pouring portion traces 280 on the side of the non-heat radiation area 264B of the back cover 22 is It is placed in a position that does not overlap with specific parts. Of course, the weld line 192b generated between the adjacent resin pouring portion traces 192 of the main substrate case 138 is also arranged at a position that does not overlap with the specific portion.

The extruded portion traces 281a on the back portion 144 side of the back cover 22 are circular with substantially the same size. A smaller number of extruded portion traces 281a are arranged on the peripheral portion of the main substrate case 138 on the side of the non-radiating region 264B on the side of the rear portion 144 than on the side of the heat radiating region 264A. Extruded portion traces 281b and 281c are also arranged at the front end of the peripheral edge portion 145 of the back cover 22, but the extruded portion trace 281b on the side of the bent portion 145b with a short bent length is semicircular and has a long bent length. The extruded portion mark 281c on the bent portion 145a side has a rectangular shape along the bent portion 145a.

Figures 68-72 illustrate a ninth embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, a large number of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 264 are provided on the upper side of the back cover 22 at predetermined intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. there is The back cover 22 has a rear part 144 for protecting the production board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, the main board case 138, the power board case 141, the dispensing board case 143, etc., which constitute the exothermic back member, and the back part 144. and a peripheral wall portion 145 that bends forward from the outer periphery of the circuit board to protect the substrate cases 134, 136, 138, 141, and 143 from the outer peripheral side. A hole 264 is provided, and viewing windows 267 to 269 are provided on the lower side.

Of the board cases 134, 136, 138, 141, and 143, the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 with high heat generation are arranged higher than the main board case 138 and the dispensing board case 143 with low heat generation. there is

The rear part 144 of the back cover 22 is divided into an upper part 22U corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 and a lower part 22D corresponding to the main board case 138, the power board case 141 and the dispensing board case 143. In this case, heat radiation holes 264 are provided intensively in the upper portion 22U of the rear surface portion 144 in order to improve heat radiation performance from the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136. FIG. The lower part 22D has viewing windows 267 to 269 to some extent, and the heat radiation hole 264 is not provided.

Although the viewing windows 267 to 269 of the lower portion 22D also serve as heat radiation holes, a small number of heat radiation holes 264 may be arranged in the lower portion 22D of the rear surface portion 144 as well.

As shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), the heat dissipation holes 264 are formed in a boundary portion 302 formed in the middle of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 in the thickness direction, and on both sides of the boundary portion 302 in the thickness direction. It has a first outwardly spreading portion 303 and a second outwardly spreading portion 304 which are formed in an outwardly spreading shape opposite to each other. The boundary portion 302 has a mountain-shaped cross section and is located inside (on the front side of the effect board case 134 side) the center of the back portion 144 in the plate thickness direction, and is roughly divided into an inner side surface 144a and an outer side surface 144b of the back side portion 144. placed in parallel. The first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 are tapered with a smaller diameter on the boundary portion 302 side. The first outwardly spreading portion 303 is formed inside (front side) from the boundary portion 302 , and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 is formed outside (on the back side of the heat repulsive backing member side) from the boundary portion 302 .

The angle α between the inner peripheral surface 303a of the first flared portion 303 and the inner surface 144a of the rear portion 144 is the angle β formed between the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second flared portion 304 and the outer surface 144b of the rear portion 144 larger than or substantially the same. In the heat dissipation hole 264, the inner opening end 303b of the first outwardly spreading portion 303 is located radially inside the outer opening end 304b of the second outwardly spreading portion 304, and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 as a whole It has a shape that is wider than the first outward spreading portion 303 on the inner side. Therefore, the opening amount 304w in the horizontal and vertical directions of the outer opening end 304b of the second outward spreading portion 304 is larger than the opening amount 303w in the horizontal and vertical directions of the inner opening end 303b of the first outward spreading portion 303. is also large.

The heat dissipation hole 264 of the rear cover 22 having such a configuration includes a first outwardly expanding portion 303 and a first outwardly expanding portion 303 formed in an outwardly expanding shape in the opposite direction in the plate thickness direction from the intermediate boundary portion 302 in the plate thickness direction of the rear cover 22 . 2, the outer peripheral portions of the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat radiation hole 264, which opens on both the inner and outer sides of the back cover 22, can be formed in an obtuse angle. improves.

In addition, since the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 are outwardly spreading in opposite directions on both sides of the intermediate boundary portion 302 in the plate thickness direction of the back cover 22, the first outwardly spreading portion of the mold is formed. Although the lengths of the heat radiation hole forming portions on the 303 side and the second outward spread portion 304 side are shortened, and the outer peripheral portions of the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat radiation hole 264 can be configured to have an obtuse angle, Mold release resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the release of the back cover 22 from the mold is facilitated, the production efficiency of the back cover 22 is improved, and deformation of the back cover 22 can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral portions of the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat dissipation hole 264 can be made obtuse, the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat dissipation hole 264 may be damaged, and the operator may be injured at the opening ends 303b and 304b of the heat dissipation hole 264. It is possible to reduce problems such as Further, since the opening amount 304w of the outer opening end 304b of the heat dissipation hole 264 is larger than the opening amount 303w of the inner opening end 303b, the heat inside the back cover 22 can be efficiently radiated.

In particular, the heat radiation hole 264 is a longitudinally elongated hole, and the vertically elongated heat radiation hole 264 is provided with a boundary portion 302, a first outwardly expanding portion 303, and a second outwardly expanding portion 304, and an outer opening end 304b of the boundary portion 302 is provided. Since the amount 304w is made larger than the opening amount 303w of the inner opening end 303b, the convection of the air inside the back cover 22 allows the hot air to be quickly discharged to the outside.

FIG. 73 illustrates a modification of the tenth embodiment. 73(a) to 73(f), the back cover 22 is provided with the heat radiation holes 264 having the first outwardly expanding portion 303 and the second outwardly expanding portion 304 on both sides of the boundary portion 302. is also possible. 73(a), the boundary portion 302 of the heat radiating hole 264 of FIG. Therefore, the inclination angle of the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outwardly spreading portion 304 is set large. In this case, the opening amount 304w of the outer opening end 304b of the second outward spreading portion 304 can be increased.

73(b), the boundary portion 302 is arranged near the center of the plate thickness of the back surface portion 144, and the second outwardly widening portion 303 has a second outwardly widening portion with respect to the inclination angle of the inner peripheral surface 303a of the first outwardly widening portion 303. The inclination angle of the inner peripheral surface 304a of the portion 304 is set large. Even when the boundary portion 302 is arranged near the center of the plate thickness of the back surface portion 144 in this way, the opening amount 304w of the outer opening end 304b of the second outward spreading portion 304 can be increased.

The heat radiation hole 264 shown in FIG. 73(c) is tapered almost entirely except for the open end 304b side of the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outwardly expanding portion 304, and the inner peripheral surface 304a of the heat dissipation hole 264 is circular on the open end 304b side. An arcuate curved portion 304c is provided. In the heat radiation hole 264 shown in FIG. 73(d), the inner peripheral surfaces 303a and 304a of the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 are both formed by arc-shaped curved surfaces. In this way, one or both of the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 may be entirely or partially curved.

73(e), chamfered portions 303d and 304d are formed on the side of the opening ends 303b and 304b of the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304, respectively. Therefore, the inner peripheral surfaces 303a and 304a of the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 are bent at the inner side portion and the side of the opening ends 303b and 304b except for the side of the opening ends 303b and 304b. Also in this case, since the chamfered portions 303d and 304d are provided on the side of the opening ends 303b and 304b, damage or injury on the side of the opening ends 303b and 304b of the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 can be prevented.

73(f), the boundary portion 302 is arranged closer to the outer side surface 144b than the center of the plate thickness of the back surface portion 144, and the opening amount 303w of the inner opening end 303b of the first outward spreading portion 303 is The opening amount 304w of the outer opening end 304b of the second outward spreading portion 304 is larger than that. In this manner, the heat dissipation hole 264 can also have an opening amount 303w at the inner opening end 303a of the first outwardly spreading portion 303 larger than an opening amount 304w at the outer opening end 304b of the second outwardly spreading portion 304. FIG.

Figures 74 and 75 illustrate the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. The back cover 22 of this embodiment has a size to protect the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, and on the upper side of the back part 144, as shown in FIG. A large number of heat radiation holes 264 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b), the heat dissipation hole 264 has a boundary portion 302 in the middle of the back cover 22 in the plate thickness direction, and is formed in an outwardly widening shape from the boundary portion 302 in the front-rear direction. It has a first flared portion 303 and a second flared portion 304 .

The first spreading portion 303 is located on the front side of the back cover 22, the second spreading portion 304 is located on the rear side of the back cover 22, and each of the spreading portions 303 and 304 has a small diameter on the boundary portion 302 side. The front side opposite to the boundary portion 302, the side of the inner opening end 303a on the rear side, and the side of the outer opening end 304a are tapered to have a larger diameter. Note that the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 may be curved outwardly.

The angle α between the inner peripheral surface 303a of the first outwardly spreading portion 303 on the front side and the inner side surface 144a of the back cover 22 is the angle between the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outwardly spreading portion 304 and the outer side surface 144b of the back cover 22. It is larger than the angle β to form. The angle α formed and the angle β formed may be substantially the same.

The heat radiation hole 264 has a stepped portion 302a at the boundary 302 between the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304. Through this stepped portion 302a, the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 303 are separated from each other. 304 are continuous in the front-rear reverse direction. The stepped portion 302a is substantially parallel to the inner side surface 144a and the outer side surface 144b of the back portion 144, and is provided closer to the outer side surface 144b than the center of the back portion 144 in the plate thickness direction.

The outer open end 304b of the second outwardly spreading portion 304 is located outside the inner open end 303b of the first outwardly spreading portion 303, and the outer open end 304b of the second outwardly spreading portion 304 is positioned horizontally and vertically. is larger than the lateral and vertical opening amounts 303w of the inner opening end 303b of the first outward spreading portion 303. As shown in FIG.

In this manner, the heat radiation hole 264 can also configure the boundary portion 302 with the stepped portion 302a substantially parallel to the back surface portion 144 . Therefore, even in such a case, the same effect as in the ninth embodiment can be obtained.

76 and 77 illustrate the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, which is a modification of the eleventh embodiment. The back cover 22 of this embodiment is sized to protect the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, and as shown in FIG. are provided at predetermined intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions and are substantially uniformly distributed.

As shown in FIG. 77, the heat dissipation hole 264 has a boundary portion 302 in the middle of the back cover 22 in the plate thickness direction, and a first outwardly expanding portion that is formed in an outwardly expanding shape from the boundary portion 302 in the front-rear reverse direction. 303 and a second flared portion 304 .

The first outward spreading portion 303 is located on the front side of the back cover 22, that is, on the effect board case 134 side, and the second outward spreading portion 304 is located on the rear surface side of the back cover 22. A tapered portion 304 has a smaller diameter on the boundary portion 302 side and a larger diameter on the front side opposite to the boundary portion 302, the inner opening end 303b side of the rear surface side, and the outer opening end 304b side. Note that the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 may be curved outwardly.

The angle α between the inner peripheral surface 303a of the first outwardly spreading portion 303 on the front side and the inner side surface 144a of the back cover 22 is the angle between the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second outwardly spreading portion 304 and the outer side surface 144b of the back cover 22. Although the angle β is larger than the angle β, in this embodiment the angle β is much smaller than the angle α, and the inner peripheral surface 304a of the second flared portion 304 is greatly inclined. The angle α formed and the angle β formed may be substantially the same.

The heat dissipation hole 264 has a stepped portion 302a at the boundary portion 302 between the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304. Through this stepped portion 302a, the first outwardly spreading portion 303 and the second outwardly spreading portion 304 are connected. are continuous in the front-rear reverse direction. The stepped portion 302a is substantially parallel to the inner side surface 144a and the outer side surface 144b of the back portion 144, and is provided closer to the outer side surface 144b than the center of the back portion 144 in the plate thickness direction.

The outer open end 304b of the second outwardly spreading portion 304 is located outside the inner open end 303b of the first outwardly spreading portion 303, and the outer open end 304b of the second outwardly spreading portion 304 is positioned horizontally and vertically. is larger than the lateral and vertical opening amounts 303w of the inner opening end 303b of the first outward spreading portion 303. As shown in FIG.

In the heat dissipation hole 264 configured in this way, the outer opening end 304b of the second outwardly spreading portion 304 is located outside the inner opening end 303b of the first outwardly spreading portion 303, so that the outside of the second outwardly spreading portion 304 is located outside the second outwardly spreading portion 304. The lateral and vertical opening amounts 304w of the opening end 304b can be increased.

75 and 77, the inner opening end 303b side and the outer opening end 304b side can be formed in an arc shape or a chamfered shape.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 includes an upper portion 22U corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, a main board case 138, a power board case 141, and a payout board case 143. It can be roughly bisected into a corresponding lower portion 22D. When the heat radiation holes 264 are provided in the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22, the number of the heat radiation holes 264 arranged near the main board case 138 is larger than the number of the heat radiation holes 264 arranged in the vicinity of the main board case 138 from the viewpoint of ensuring an efficient heat radiation effect. 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136. It is desirable that the number of the heat radiation holes 264 be concentrated in the upper portion 22U of the back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22.

Therefore, when the distribution of the heat dissipation holes 264 is compared between the upper part 22U and the lower part 22D, the heat dissipation holes 264 are not provided in the lower part 22D of the rear surface part 144, but are provided in substantially the entire upper part 22U. They may be distributed substantially evenly.

Of course, the lower portion 22D of the rear portion 144 may have fewer heat dissipation holes 264 than the upper portion 22U. The upper part 22U and the lower part 22D of the back surface part 144 of the rear cover 22 are provided with different numbers of heat radiation holes 264, and also with different opening amounts, so that the opening amount of the heat radiation holes 264 of the upper part 22U is varied. It may be larger than the opening amount of the heat radiation holes 264 of the lower part 22D.

Figures 78-101 illustrate a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 78 to 81, the gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3 arranged in front of the outer frame 2, and a front door 4 opens and closes in front of the inner frame 3. placed freely. The outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3 constitute gaming machine frames 2 and 3 . Note that the game machine frames 2 and 3 may be configured by other than the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3, such as a housing whose front side is open.

The inner frame 3 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge means 6 so as to be freely openable and detachable. It can be locked in any state. The front door 4 is pivotally attached to the inner frame 3 via the second hinge means 7 so as to be freely openable and detachable. It can be locked in any state.

The outer frame 2 includes a pair of left and right vertical frame members 9, an upper horizontal frame member 10 connecting the upper ends of the left and right vertical frame members 9 to the left and right, and connecting the lower ends of the left and right vertical frame members 9 to the left and right. It is formed in a rectangular shape by a lower horizontal frame member 11 and a decorative member 12 arranged in front of the lower horizontal frame member 11 and connecting the left and right vertical frame members 9 .

A game board mounting portion 13 and a rear protection portion 14 are integrally provided on the upper side of the inner frame 3, and a lower mounting portion 15 is integrally provided on the lower side of the game board mounting portion 13. - 特許庁A game board 16 is detachably attached to the game board mounting portion 13 from the front side. The back protection part 14 protects the back side mechanism 17 arranged on the back side of the game board 16 from the outer peripheral side. The lower mounting portion 15 is provided with a game ball shooting means 25, a lower speaker 25b, and the like.

The front door 4 has a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the inner frame 3, and is provided with a viewing window 53 through which the game area 26 of the game board 16 can be viewed. The front door 4 includes a rectangular door frame 55, and a lower unit 56, a first upper unit 57 and a second upper unit 58 mounted on the front surface of the door frame 55. As shown in FIG.

The lower unit 56 is arranged in front of the door frame 55 below the viewing window 53 , and the first upper unit 57 is arranged vertically on the first hinge means 6 side of the viewing window 53 . The second upper unit 58 straddles the horizontal direction above the viewing window 53 and the vertical direction on the side opposite to the first hinge means 6 of the viewing window 53, and is arranged in front of the door frame 55 in an L shape when viewed from the front. It is arranged detachably.

The viewing window 53 is closed by a glass unit (transparent plate unit) 75 detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 55 . The glass unit 75 includes two front and rear glass plates that allow the game area 26 to be seen through, and a holding frame that holds the outer sides of the two front and rear glass plates. there is

The lower unit 56 has a substantially triangular shape in plan view with the left and right central portions protruding forward, and includes a first operation presentation means 46, an upper tray 52 for storing game balls to be shot by the shooting means 25, and a surplus ball. A lower plate (surplus ball storage portion) 61 and a lower cover 62 covering the outer peripheral side of these are provided, and the shooting means 25 for the shooting means 25 is provided on the side opposite to the upper plate 52 and the like with respect to the first operation effect means 46. A handle 63 is provided.

The first upper unit 57 includes a front side cover 93 that is elongated in the vertical direction, and an LED type light emitting means (not shown) arranged on the back side of the side cover 93. A predetermined portion of the side cover 93 emits light by the light from the means.

The second upper unit 58 includes a horizontal main body portion 95 arranged above the viewing window 53, a vertical vertical main body portion 96 arranged on the right side of the viewing window 53, and a central portion of the horizontal main body portion 95. and a second operation effect means 47 arranged in the vertical central portion of the vertical body portion 96, and the door can be opened via a mounting means such as an engaging means. It is detachably attached to the front surface of the frame 55 .

Hinge means 6 and 7 are constructed as shown in FIGS. That is, the first hinge means 6 comprises an upper first hinge mechanism 307 and a lower first hinge mechanism 308, and the second hinge means 7 comprises an upper second hinge mechanism 309 and a lower second hinge mechanism 310. there is

As shown in FIG. 82, the upper first hinge mechanism 307 includes a fixed hinge 311 fixed to the outer frame 2 and having a hinge hole 311a, and a hinge fixed to the inner frame 3 and fitted into the hinge hole 311a from above. and a movable hinge 312 having an axis 312a. As shown in FIG. 83, the lower first hinge mechanism 308 has a fixed hinge 313 fixed to the outer frame 2 and having a hinge shaft 313a, and a fixed hinge 313 fixed to the inner frame 3 and fitted with the hinge shaft 313a from below. A combined hinge 314 having a hinge hole 314a is provided. The movable hinge 312 and dual-purpose hinge 314 of the first hinge mechanisms 307 and 308 are slidably supported by fixed hinges 311 and 313 around hinge shafts 312a and 313a.

As shown in FIG. 82, the upper second hinge mechanism 309 is fixed to the inner frame 3 and has a hinge hole 315a. A fixed hinge 315 is fixed to the front door 4 and fitted into the hinge hole 315a from below. and a movable hinge 316 having a hinge shaft 316a. The movable hinge 316 is U-shaped, and a hinge shaft 316a is vertically slidably inserted through the movable hinge 316 and is biased upward by a spring 316b. The hinge shaft 316a has an operation portion 316c that is bent in an L shape from below. By operating this operation portion 316c, the hinge shaft 316a can be operated in the insertion/removal direction with respect to the hinge hole 315a.

As shown in FIG. 83, the lower second hinge mechanism 310 includes a dual-purpose hinge member 314 on the side of the inner frame 3 having a hinge shaft 317a, and a hinge hole 318a fixed to the front door 4 and into which the hinge shaft 317a is fitted from below. and a movable hinge 318 having a The dual-purpose hinge 314 serves both as the movable side of the lower first hinge mechanism 308 and as the fixed side of the lower second hinge mechanism 310. The inner side of the cylindrical portion fixed to this dual-purpose hinge 314 is the hinge hole. 314a, the outside functions as a hinge axis 317a. Movable hinges 316 and 318 of the second hinge mechanisms 309 and 310 are slidably supported around hinge shafts 316a and 317a by a fixed hinge 315 and a combined hinge 314, respectively.

The first locking means 73 and second locking means 74 are constructed as shown in FIGS. Correspondingly, they are provided across the outer frame 2 and the inner frame 3 and between the inner frame 3 and the front door 4 . As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the lock receiving portion 319 is provided in the vertical direction at the end of the inner frame 3, and in its interior is a support member having an L-shaped cross section having a mounting portion 320a and a support portion 320b. 320 and a protection member 321 attached to the support member 320 from the back side are provided, and an interlocking member 322 is provided vertically between the support member 320 and the protection member 321 .

As shown in FIGS. 84, 86 and 89, the first locking means 73 comprises a pair of upper and lower first receivers 323 fixed inside the vertical frame member 9 of the outer frame 2 and provided on the inner frame 3 side. and a pair of upper and lower first hooks 324 that are detachably engaged with the first receiver 323 from below. Each first hook 324 is rotatably supported by a supporting shaft 325 extending in the horizontal direction to a supporting portion 320b of a supporting member 320, and a helical spring 326 wound around the supporting shaft 325 and provided between the supporting portion 320b and the supporting portion 320b. is biased in the engagement direction by

The first hook 324 has an engaging portion 324 a that engages with the first receiver 323 , and contacts the first receiver 323 when the inner frame 3 is closed to resist the first hook 324 against the coiled spring 326 . and a guide portion 324b that rotates around the support shaft 325. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 84 and 87, the second locking means 74 consists of a plurality of second receiving members 328 formed by bending a reinforcing member 327 on the back side of the door frame 55 of the front door 4 in the vertical direction. , and a plurality of second hooks 329 arranged in the vertical direction, which are provided on the inner frame 3 side and are releasably engaged with the second receivers 328 from below. Each second hook 329 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 330 extending in the left-right direction on a support portion 320b of a support member 320 on the inner frame 3 side, and is hooked between a spring hook portion 320c of the support portion 320b. It is urged in the engagement direction by the tension spring 331 which is connected.

Each second hook 329 has an engaging portion 329a that engages with the second receiver 328 and a tension spring 331 that contacts the second receiver 328 when the front door 4 is closed. It also has a guide portion 329b that rotates about the support shaft 330 against it. In addition, since the strength of the front door 4 is lower than that of the inner frame 3, the second receiving tool 328 and the second hanging tool 329 are provided at three positions, namely, the upper, middle, and lower positions, but may be provided at two upper and lower positions. .

84 to 86 and 90 to 92, the first hook 324 of the first locking means 73 and the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74 are released by a release operation mechanism via an interlocking member 322, as shown in FIGS. 333 , and when the operation key 334 inserted into the cylinder lock 336 of the release operation mechanism 333 is operated in the direction of the arrow A, the first hook 324 of the first locking means 73 is opened via the interlocking member 322 . When the operation key 334 is operated in the direction indicated by arrow B in the release direction, the second hooks 329 of the second locking means 74 can be individually operated in the release direction via the interlocking member 322 .

The interlocking member 322 has elongated guide holes 335a vertically formed at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the support portion 320b and slid vertically by guide pins 335b inserted into the guide holes 335a. It is freely supported and urged to a vertically neutral position by urging means 337 . A guide means 335 for the interlocking member 322 is constituted by the guide hole 335a and the guide pin 335b.

The interlocking member 322 has a first operating portion 338 corresponding to the first hook 324 of the first locking means 73 and a second operating portion 339 corresponding to the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74, When the locking means 73 and 74 are in the locked state, they are held in the neutral position by the biasing means 337, the first operating portion 338 is near the first hook 324, and the second operating portion 339 is near the second hook 329. , respectively.

When the inner frame 3 is unlocked by the first locking means 73, the operation key 334 is operated in the direction of the arrow A to move the interlocking member 322 upward from the neutral position. Since the portion 338 operates the first hook 324 , the first hook 324 rotates around the support shaft 325 against the coiled spring 326 and is released from the first receiver 323 .

When the front door 4 is unlocked by the second locking means 74, when the operation key 334 is operated in the direction of the arrow B, the interlocking member 322 moves downward from the neutral position, and the second operation portion Since 339 operates the second hook 329, the second hook 329 rotates around the support shaft 330 against the tension spring 331 and is released from the second receiver 328. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the biasing means 337 consists of a pair of upper and lower spring hooks 341 and 342 fitted in the biasing hole 340 of the interlocking member 322 and hooked between the spring hooks 341 and 342. It has a tension spring 343 attached to it. Each of the spring hooks 341 and 342 has engaging portions 341a and 342a that bend toward the support member 320 from the side opposite to the tension spring 343. , 342b of the support member 320 can be engaged with the engaging portions 341c and 342c of the support member 320, respectively.

The locking portions 341b and 342b of the interlocking member 322 and the locking portions 341c and 342c of the support member 320 are vertically spaced at substantially the same intervals. Engaging portions 341a and 342a of 342 are engaged with locking portions 341c and 342c of interlocking member 322 and support member 320, and interlocking member 322 is held at a neutral position by tension spring 343 via spring hooks 341 and 342. do.

In this biasing means 337, if the interlocking member 322 rises when the first locking means 73 is released, the upper engaging portion 341b pushes up the engaging portion 341a of the upper spring hook 341. biases the interlocking member 322 in the return direction (downward direction) to return it to the neutral position. Further, when the interlocking member 322 descends when the second locking means 74 is released, the lower locking portion 342b becomes the engaging portion of the lower spring hook 342 as shown by the two-dot chain lines in FIGS. In order to push down 342a, the tension spring 343 urges the interlocking member 322 in the return direction (upward direction) to return it to the neutral position. Therefore, one tension spring 343 can bias the interlocking member 322 vertically in two different directions.

As shown in FIGS. 86 and 90 to 92, the release operation mechanism 333 includes a driven-side linking portion 344 provided on the lower front side of the interlocking member 322 on the inner frame 3 side, and a linking portion 344 corresponding to the linking portion 344. a driving-side linking member 345 which is provided on the back side of the door frame 55 of the front door 4 so as to be movable in the vertical direction and which is removably engaged with the linking portion 344 from the front side when the front door 4 is closed; a cylinder lock 336 fixed to the door frame 55 of the door 4 in the longitudinal direction; an operation shaft 346 projecting rearward from the cylinder lock 336 and capable of forward and reverse operation by an operation key 334 inserted into the cylinder lock 336 from the front; An engaging tool 347 is fixed to the operating shaft 346 and engages the linking member 345 so as to be vertically operable.

The linking portion 344 protrudes forward from an opening 348 of the inner frame 3 and is provided in the left-right direction so as to face the linking member 322 . The cylinder lock 336 is fixed to the door frame 55 of the front door 4 via a mount 349 . The mounting base 349 has a support portion 349a that is bent rearward and arranged in the vertical direction. It is slidably provided in the direction. The linking member 345 has a linking engaging portion 345a which is formed in a U-shape whose rear side is open and which is engaged with the linking portion 344 so as to be freely engaged and disengaged in the front-rear direction. It has a pair of upper and lower guide portions 345b for guiding the portion 344 into the cooperating engagement portion 345a.

The linking member 345 and the interlocking member 322 can move up and down in cooperation with the up-down movement of the linking member 345 when the linking portion 344 is positioned within the linking engagement portion 345a. is released to open the front door 4 from the closed state to the stop position Y in the vicinity of the front side of the inner frame 3, the linking portion 344 is disengaged rearward from the linking engagement portion 345a, so that the linking member 345 moves up and down. Also, the interlocking member 322 becomes unable to cooperate and does not move up and down.

The linking member 345 is urged to the neutral position by the tension spring 351a of the urging means 351. As shown in FIG. The engaging member 347 has engaging portions 347a and 347b that engage with the engaged portion 345c of the linking member 345 from both upper and lower sides. The linking member 345 can be operated in two directions, up and down, through the joining portions 347a and 347b. The biasing means 351 is the same as the biasing means 337 in principle.

An open/close detecting means 354 capable of detecting opening/closing of the inner frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opening/closing of the front door 4 with respect to the inner frame 3 is provided at the upper end of the inner frame 3 opposite to the hinge means 6 and 7. there is As shown in FIG. 79, the opening/closing detection means 354 includes a detection switch 355 having detection portions 355a and 355b projecting forward and backward, and when the inner frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the detection portions When the front door 4 is closed with respect to the inner frame 3, the detection portion 355a comes into contact with the front door 4. It contacts the portion 357 to detect the closed state of the front door 4 .

Between the inner frame 3 and the front door 4, when the front door 4 in the open state is closed around the second hinge means 7, the front door 4 is gradually moved as the front door 4 rotates toward the inner frame 3 side. A first lifting means 359 for lifting, and a second lifting means 360 for lifting and supporting the front door 4 to the normal locking height with respect to the inner frame 3 when the second locking means 74 is locked in the closed state of the front door 4. and a front door stopping means 361 for stopping the front door 4 at a stop position Y in the vicinity of the front side of the inner frame 3 when the locking of the front door 4 by the second locking means 74 is released. Note that the front door 4 is in a half-open state when stopped at the stop position Y. Therefore, the stop position Y is also the half-open position of the front door 4 .

As shown in FIGS. 80, 86, 95, and 96, the first lifting means 359 includes a receiving member 362 horizontally provided on the lower end side of the inner frame 3 in the left-right direction, and a lower surface side of the front door 4. , a bottom surface member 363 arranged in the left-right direction facing the receiving member 362, and an inclined guide portion 364 provided on the receiving member 362 at a predetermined interval in the left-right direction.

With such a first lifting means 359, when the front door 4 is rotated around the second hinge means 7 toward the inner frame 3 and closed, the front door 4 rotates toward the inner frame 3. Accordingly, the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 is lifted onto the receiving member 362 sequentially by riding on the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 from the inclined guide portion 364 near the second hinge means 7 to the inclined guide portion 364 farther. can be done. Therefore, even if the side of the front door 4 opposite to the second hinge means 7 hangs down, the front door 4 can be easily closed.

At the lower end of the front door 4, there is a stepped portion 365 that comes close to or abuts against the front side of the receiving member 362 to prevent fraud. Therefore, fraudulent acts such as inserting fraudulent members from below the inner frame 3 and the front door 4 can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 80, 81 and 96, the second lifting means 360 is arranged at the end opposite to the second hinge means 7, and has a lifting receiving portion 367 formed on the inner frame 3 side. , and a lifting protrusion 368 formed on the front door 4 side, and when the front door 4 is closed, the front door 4 is raised to the regular locking height by lifting the lifting protrusion 368 with a lifting receiving part 367. It is designed to be lifted and supported. Therefore, when the front door 4 is locked by the second locking means 74 , the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 does not always rest on the inclined guide portion 364 of the receiving member 362 .

As shown in FIGS. 80, 81 and 96, the front door stop means 361 is configured so that the lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 and the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 opposite to the second hinge means 7 are placed downward. A receiving member 362 on the side of the inner frame 3 that receives from the side is provided. The front door stop means 361 is operated when the side of the front door 4 opposite to the hinge means 7 side (the second locking means 74 side) is opened forward from the closed position X to the stop position Y and enters a half-open state. , a receiving member 362 on the side of the inner frame 3 that receives the abutting portion 363a at the end opposite to the second hinge means 7 of the lower surface member 363 from below, and stops the front door 4 when the front door 4 is opened. It is configured to be temporarily stopped at the position Y in a half-open state.

As shown in FIGS. 80, 81 and 96, the front door stopping means 361 includes a lower surface member 363 of the front door 4 and an inner frame that receives the end of the lower surface member 363 opposite to the second hinge means 7 from below. 3 side receiving member 362 is provided. 100, when the front door 4 is opened, the front door stop means 361 moves from the closed position X to the stop position on the opposite side of the front door 4 to the hinge means 7 side (second locking means 74 side). When it is opened forward to Y and is in a half-open state, the receiving member 362 on the inner frame 3 side receives at least the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 at the end opposite to the second hinge means 7 from below. is configured as

In the closed state in which the front door 4 is closed to the inner frame 3 side, the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74 is engaged with the second receiving member 328 to lock the front door 4 . The open/close detection means 354 detects the closed state of the front door 4 .

When the front door 4 is to be opened, the operation key 334 inserted into the cylinder lock 336 is operated in the B arrow direction to unlock the front door 4 by the second locking means 74 . In this case, when the operation key 334 is operated in the B arrow direction, the engaging member 347 rotates around the operation shaft 346 in the same direction, and the linking member 345 descends. When the linking member 345 descends, the linking member 322 descends to the linking engaging portion 345a of the linking member 345 via the linking portion 344, and the second operating portion 339 engages the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74. For downward operation, the second hook 329 rotates around the support shaft 330 against the tension spring 331 . When the second hanging member 329 rotates, it is removed from the second receiving member 328, so that the locking of the front door 4 by the second locking means 74 at three positions in the vertical direction can be released substantially simultaneously.

Since the front door 4 has the second upper unit 58 and the like projecting forward from the door frame 55 on the upper part of the front door 4, the center of gravity G of the front door 4 is the second hinge as shown in FIGS. It is located in the vicinity of the middle position in the left-right direction away from the means 7 toward the second locking means 74, and is further away from the line segment (plane) connecting the upper and lower second hinge means 7 and the second locking means 74 to the front side. will be located in position.

Therefore, when the front door 4 is unlocked by removing all of the three second locking means 74 in the vertical direction, the front door 4 is opened by the moment around the second hinge means 7 due to its own weight. It rotates slightly forward toward the opening direction to the closed position X around the second hinge means 7 . When the front door 4 is slightly rotated about the second hinge means 7 in the opening direction, the lifting protrusion 368 of the second lifting means 360 is released from the lifting receiving part 367 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the front door 4 is in a cantilevered state by the second hinge means 7, and the second locking means 74 side of the front door 4 hangs downward due to the weight of the front door 4 itself.

Then, when the front door 4 rotates to the stop position Y and the second locking means 74 side of the front door 4 hangs downward by the inclination angle α as shown in FIG. 98, the contact portion 363a contacts the receiving member 362 of the inner frame 3, so that the front door stopping means 361 can stop the front door 4 at the stop position.

As a result, if a manager, a player, or the like is in the open area around the front side of the front door 4, the locking of the front door 4 by the second locking means 74 may be erroneously released. Also, it is possible to prevent an injury or the like from being caused by the front door 4 that opens forward.

On the other hand, when the three second locking means 74 in the vertical direction of the front door 4 are released, one end of the front door 4 is supported by the two upper and lower second hinge means 7. The load of the entire front door 4 is supported by the two second hinge means 7 and the front door stopping means 361 . At this time, the center of gravity G of the front door 4 as a whole is located in front of the line segment (plane) connecting the two upper and lower hinge means 7 and the front door stopping means 361, and is located on the side of the two upper and lower second hinge means 7. As shown in FIG. 99(b), the end of the front door 4 on the side of the second locking means 74 opposite to the second hinge means 7 has its upper end inside. It moves away from the frame 2 to the front side, the lower end side approaches the inner frame 2 side, and exhibits a forward tilting posture with an inclination angle β, and a forward force is applied to the upper end side, and a rearward force is applied to the lower end side.

As a result, when looking at the relationship between the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 of the front door stopping means 361 and the receiving member 362, the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 contacts the receiving member 362 while receiving a rearward force. Because of the contact, the receiving member 362 can easily receive the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363, and the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 does not come off from the lower surface member 363 inadvertently forward. Therefore, when the front door 4 is in a half-open state, the front door stopping means 361 can stably stop the front door 4 at the stop position.

When the front door 4 is stopped in a half-open state at the stop position by the front door stopping means 361, the second hook 329 of the second locking means 74 at the bottom of the three upper and lower second locking means 74 is As shown in , the interlocking member 322 is in a lowered state, such as contacting the lower side of the second receiving member 328 . As a result, the second locking means 74 is tilted forward, and the link between the link engaging portion 345a of the link member 345 and the link portion 344 is released. The interlocking member 322 does not move up and down.

Therefore, when the front door 4 is stopped at the stop position, even if the operation key 344 is operated in the direction indicated by the arrow A, the interlocking member 322 does not interlock and rise. It is not possible to release the inner frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by releasing 73 .

When opening both the inner frame 3 and the front door 4, the first locking means 73 is released to release the inner frame 3 from the outer frame 2, and then the second locking means 74 is released to open the front door 4. should be released.

In order to open the front door 4 in the stopped state, the front door 4 can be rotated around the second hinge means 7 by grasping an appropriate portion of the end of the front door 4 on the side of the second locking means 74 and pulling it forward. It can be opened up to the fully open position. In this case as well, in the front door stopping means 361 , the lower surface member 363 is simply placed on the receiving member 362 , so the lower surface member 363 can be easily removed from the receiving member 362 .

When the front door 4 is half-opened, the gap between the inner frame 3 and the front door 4 is widened, so that the opening/closing detection means 354 can reliably detect that the front door 4 is open.

FIG. 102 illustrates a fourteenth embodiment that is a modification of the eleventh embodiment. 102(a), the front door stopping means 361 also includes a receiving member 362 on the side of the inner frame 3 and a lower surface member 363 on the side of the front door 4 placed on the receiving member 362. In addition, when the front door 4 is positioned at the stop position X, the contact portion 363a of the lower surface member 363 is received by the receiving member 362 and stopped. As shown in FIG. 102(b), the lower surface member 363 is extended to the rear, and the rear end is brought close to the rear end side upright portion 362a of the receiving member 362 of the inner frame 3, while the lower surface 363b of the lower surface member 363 is It is configured to be substantially flush with the lower end surface of the front door 4 .

By bringing the rear end of the lower surface member 363 closer to the rear end side upright portion 362a of the receiving member 362 in this manner, insertion of an unauthorized member from between the receiving member 362 and the upright portion 362a and the lower surface member 363 is prevented. Therefore, the stepped portion 365 at the bottom of the front door 4 can be omitted.

The front door stopping means 361 may stop the front door 4 by frictional resistance between the receiving member 362 and the lower surface member 363. You may make it stop the front door 4 by. The contact portion 363 a of the lower surface member 363 may be configured in an inclined shape so as to be in surface contact with the upper surface of the inclined guide portion 364 . The position of the center of gravity G of the front door 4 is merely an example, and is not limited to this position.

At the stop position Y, the front door 4 is in a half-open state with respect to the inner frame 3, and the contact portion 363a of the front door 4 opposite to the second hinge means 7 is received by the receiving member 362. The stop position Y can also be set to a position where the front door 4 is opened more than the half-open state. It should be noted that the stop position Y must be set to the extent that the unexpected opening of the front door 4 does not pose a problem.

Figures 103-105 illustrate a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. The back cover 22 is an example of a game part, and as shown in FIGS. 103 and 105, a large number of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 264 are provided at predetermined intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. It is The back cover 22 includes a back portion 144 that protects the performance substrate case 134, the liquid crystal substrate case 136, the main substrate case 138, and the like, which constitute the exothermic back member, from the back side, and the back portion 144 that bends forward from the outer periphery of the back portion 144 to cover the substrate. It has a peripheral wall portion 145 that protects the cases 134, 136, 138, etc. from the outer peripheral side, the rear portion 144 is provided with a laterally elongated heat radiation hole 264 on the upper side and a viewing window 267 on the lower side. is provided.

Among the board cases 134, 136, 138, the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 with high heat generation are arranged above the main board case 138 and the dispensing board case 143 with low heat generation.

The rear part 144 of the back cover 22 is divided into an upper part 22U corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, and a lower part 22D corresponding to the main board case 138 from the lower side of the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136. 2, in order to improve the heat radiation from the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136, the upper part 22U of the rear part 144 is provided with heat radiation holes 264 intensively. The lower part 22D has a viewing window 267 to some extent, and the heat radiation hole 264 is not provided. Therefore, in the rear portion 144 of the rear cover 22, the upper portion 22U having a large number of heat radiation holes 264 serves as a heat dissipation area 264A, and the imperforate lower portion 22D having no openings other than the viewing window 267 serves as a non-heat dissipation area 264B. ing.

The back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 has first to fifth resin pouring traces G11, G21, G31, G41, and G51. Molten resin is poured substantially simultaneously into the molding space of the mold from the first to fifth resin pouring portions G1 to G5 corresponding to .

When the first to fifth resins g1 to g5 are poured substantially simultaneously into these first to fifth resin pouring parts G1 to G5, the first to fifth resins g1 to g5 flow from the back part 144 of the mold. It is arranged so as to efficiently fill the molding space that straddles the entire peripheral wall portion 145, and the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 are arranged on the side of the non-heat dissipation region 264B having a large area, and the area The fourth and fifth resin pouring portions G4 and G5 are arranged on the side of the narrow heat dissipation region 264A. In addition, since the left and right curved portions 145a and 145b have different lengths, the peripheral wall portion 145 is displaced toward the longer curved portion 145a.

The first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin pouring part G2 are arranged on both left and right sides of the middle part in the vertical direction of the non-heat dissipation area 264B. A third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged in the vicinity of the lower side of the group of heat radiation holes 264 in the region 264A. On the rear surface portion 144 of the back cover 22, there are weld lines between the first resin pouring portion mark G11 and the third resin pouring portion mark G31, and between the second resin pouring portion mark G21 and the third resin pouring portion mark G31. WL1 and WL2 are occurring.

The fourth resin pouring portion G4 and the fifth resin pouring portion G5 are arranged on the left and right within the group of heat dissipation holes 264 on the upper side of the third resin pouring portion G3. A weld line WL3 is generated between the traces G31 and G41, a weld line WL4 is generated between the third and fifth resin pouring portion traces G31 and G51, and furthermore, a weld line WL4 is generated between the fourth and fifth resin pouring portion traces G41 and G51. A weld line WL5 is generated in the middle.

Next, the relationship among the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 will be considered. When molding the back cover 22, the first to third resins g1 to g3 are poured substantially simultaneously from the first to third resin pouring parts G1 to G3 and molded. and the third resin pouring part G3 is shorter than half the distance B between the first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin pouring part G2, as shown in FIG. ing.

Therefore, the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 are filled with the first to third resin g1 to g3 poured from the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3, and diffuse in the molding space. As indicated by 105, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring part G3 is interposed between the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring part G2. It has a positional relationship that allows you to enter and cut in.

Further, there is a heat radiation area 264A having a large number of heat radiation holes 264 in the vicinity of the upper side of the third resin pouring part G3. It has the function of promoting the flow of the third resin g3 to the side between the pouring parts G1 and G2. As a result, the speed at which the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 flows downward in the direction indicated by the arrow g3a is , g2 flow toward the center in the direction indicated by the arrows g1a and g2a. good.

The group of heat radiation holes 264 on the upper side of the third resin pouring part G3 restricts the upward flow of the third resin g3, so that the first and second resin pouring parts G1 on the side opposite to the group of heat radiation holes 264 , G2 to between the first and second resins g1 and g2.

When the back cover 22 is injection-molded, when the first to third resins g1 to g3 are poured into the mold from the first to third resin pouring parts G1 to G3 substantially simultaneously, the first to third resins g1 to g3 are The resin flows sequentially toward the outer periphery of the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 and fills the molding space.

At this time, the first and second resins g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 flow while diffusing around the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. , the flow velocity gradually decreases with increasing distance from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2.

On the other hand, in the third resin g3 flowing downward from the third resin pouring portion G3, the interval A is as short as half or less of the interval B between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. , from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 on both left and right sides to the center side in the direction of the arrow in FIG. , g2.

In particular, there is a group of heat dissipation holes 264 on the upper side of the third resin pouring part G3, and this group of heat dissipation holes 264 hinders the upward flow of the third resin g3. The flow of the third resin g3 is accelerated. Therefore, before the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring part G2 join from both left and right sides, the third resin g3 is mixed with the first resin g1, the second resin g1, It enters between g2 and prevents the merging of the first and second resins g1 and g2.

In this manner, the third resin g3 in the center joins the first resin g1 and the second resin g2 on both sides separately, so that the first weld is formed at the joining portion of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3. A line WL1 and a second weld line WL2 are generated at the junction of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3.

However, around the first resin pouring portion trace G11, the second resin pouring portion trace G21, and the third resin pouring portion trace G31, there are the first resin g1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 from the first resin pouring portion G1. There is no confluence trace of the second resin g2 from the third resin pouring part G3 and the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring part G3.

Therefore, although the back cover 22 is molded by pouring the first to third resins g1 to g3 from the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 substantially simultaneously into the molding space of the mold, the weld line is Since the number of WL1 and WL2 generated is two, and the weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated separately on both sides of the third resin g3, the rigidity of the back cover 22 can be prevented from being lowered.

The distance between the left and right first weld lines WL1 and the second weld lines WL2 becomes closer as the distance from the third resin pouring portion G3 decreases. When the confluence angle of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3 increases, the first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 become invisible and disappear after that, but do not cross each other.

Figures 106-108 illustrate a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 108, the rear cover 22 is provided with a large number of vertically elongated radiation holes 264 which are vertically and horizontally spaced at predetermined intervals. The back cover 22 includes a back portion 144 that protects the performance substrate case 134, the liquid crystal substrate case 136, the main substrate case 138, and the like, which constitute the exothermic back member, from the back side, and the back portion 144 that bends forward from the outer periphery of the back portion 144 to cover the substrate. It has a peripheral wall portion 145 that protects the cases 134, 136, and 138 from the outer peripheral side, and the rear portion 144 is provided with a vertically long heat dissipation hole 264 on the upper side and a viewing window 267 on the lower side. It is

When the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 is divided into an upper portion 22U corresponding to the effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal substrate case 136 and a lower portion 22D corresponding to the main board case 138, the upper portion 22U has a heat dissipation hole. 264 are provided intensively, and the lower part 22D has a viewing window 267 to some extent, and the heat radiation hole 264 is not provided.

Therefore, the upper portion 22U of the back portion 144 of the back cover 22 serves as a heat dissipation area 264A, and the lower portion 22D serves as a non-heat dissipation area 264B. Note that the heat radiation hole 264 is formed in a vertically elongated hole shape.

The back surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 has first to fifth resin pouring traces G11 to G51. 5. The first to fifth resins g1 to g5 are poured from the resin pouring parts G1 to G5 into the molding space of the mold for molding.

The first resin pouring portion G1 is located between the heat radiation area 264A and the viewing window 267 on the curved portion 145a side of the rear portion 144, and the second resin pouring portion G2 is located on the curved portion 145b side of the rear portion 144 and within the heat radiation holes 264. is provided in The third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged below the intermediate position between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 and closer to the second resin pouring portion G2 with respect to the viewing window 267 .

A first weld line WL1 is between the first resin pouring portion trace G11 and the third resin pouring portion trace G31, and a second weld line WL2 is between the second resin pouring portion trace G21 and the third resin pouring portion trace G3. are occurring respectively.

In addition, the fourth resin pouring portion G4 and the fifth resin pouring portion G5 are arranged on the left and right sides in the group of heat dissipation holes 264 on the upper side of the heat dissipation region 264A, and between the first and fourth resin pouring portion traces G11 and G41. A weld line WL3 is generated between the traces of the second and fifth resin pouring portions G21 and G51, and a weld line WL5 is generated between the traces of the fourth and fifth resin pouring portions G41 and G51.

A plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 are formed on the side of the second resin pouring part G2 of the first resin pouring part G1 and on the side of the first resin pouring part G1 of the second resin pouring part G2. First and second resin flow inhibition portions C1 and C2 are provided to inhibit the flow of the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from G1 and G2 toward the other side. In the first and second resin flow inhibiting portions C1 and C2, the first and second resins g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 flow toward the other side. A heat dissipation hole 264 is arranged across.

A resin flow guide portion C3 is provided between the heat dissipation holes 264 between the first and second resin flow inhibition portions C1 and C2. In this resin flow guide portion C3, the heat radiation holes 264 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the heat radiation holes 264 are arranged in the vertical direction with respect to the upward flow direction of the third resin g3 poured from the third resin pouring portion G3. direction. Therefore, resin flow is easier in the resin flow guide portion C3 than in the first and second resin flow inhibition portions C1 and C2.

In such a configuration, even when the first to third resins g1 to g3 are poured substantially simultaneously from the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 when molding the back cover 22, the same operation as in the twelfth embodiment is performed. Then, a first weld line WL1 is generated at the junction of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3, and a second weld line WL2 is generated at the junction of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. There exists an effect similar to embodiment.

That is, the first and second resins g1 and 2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 pass through the labyrinthine paths between the heat radiation holes 264 of the first and second resin flow blocking portions C1 and C2. 108 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. On the other hand, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 flows rapidly in the forward direction in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 108 through the heat dissipation holes 264 of the resin flow guide portion C3.

Therefore, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 enters and interrupts between the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing from both left and right sides toward the center, similar to the twelfth embodiment. Then, a first weld line WL1 is generated at the junction of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3, and a second weld line WL2 is generated at the junction of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. There exists an effect similar to embodiment.

Figures 109-112 illustrate a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the rear cover 22 has a back surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145, and a heat radiation area 264A having a large number of heat radiation holes 264 is provided on the upper side of the back surface portion 144. A non-radiating area 264B is provided on the lower side. The heat radiation holes 264 are elongated in the vertical direction and arranged in a zigzag pattern in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Ribs 375 protruding forward from the back surface portion 144 are provided in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the lower side of the heat dissipation region 264A, and extend across the heat dissipation region 264A and the non-heat dissipation region 264B to form the first to the first ribs 375. First to third resin pouring portion traces G11 to G31 corresponding to three resin pouring portions G1 to G3 are formed.

The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged on the right side of the non-radiating region 264B. The second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged in the group of heat dissipation holes 264 on the right side of the heat dissipation region 264A corresponding to the upper side of the first resin pouring portion mark G11. The third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged near the upper side of the rib 375 on the left side of the intermediate position between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2.

Above the first resin pouring portion G1, there is provided a first resin flow inhibition portion C1 that intersects with the flow of the first resin g1 and inhibits the upward flow of the first resin g1. Further, below the second resin pouring portion mark G2, there is provided a second resin flow inhibition portion C2 which is constituted by a plurality of heat radiation holes 264 and which inhibits the downward flow of the second resin g2.

In the vicinity of the lower side of the third resin pouring portion G3, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 is placed between the first and second resins g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. A resin flow guide portion C3 is provided to precede and guide to. The first resin flow inhibiting portion C1 and the resin flow guide portion C3 are formed by ribs 375 on the rear surface.

The base portion of the rib 375 with the back portion 144 has a larger cross-sectional area than the other portions. Therefore, the first resin g1 rising from the first resin pouring portion G1 is difficult to enter the rib 375 and move upward as indicated by the arrow g11 in FIG. Also, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 enters the rib 375 as indicated by the arrow g31 in FIG.

Above the resin flow guide portion C3, a fourth resin flow inhibiting portion C4 is provided to inhibit the flow of the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 to the second resin pouring portion G2. The second and fourth resin flow inhibition portions C2 and C4 are composed of groups of a plurality of heat radiation holes 264. As shown in FIG.

A first weld line WL1 is generated between the first resin pouring portion trace G11 and the third resin pouring portion trace G31, and a second weld line is generated between the second resin pouring portion trace G21 and the third resin pouring portion trace G31. Line WL2 is generated.

Note that the fourth and fifth resin pouring portion traces G41 and G51 are arranged on both the left and right sides within the group of heat dissipation holes 264 on the upper side of the heat dissipation region 264A. The third weld line WL3 is between the marks G31 and G41 of the third and fourth resin pouring portions, the fourth weld line WL4 is between the marks G21 and G51 of the second and fifth resin pouring portions, and the fourth and fifth resin pouring portions. A fifth weld line WL5 is generated between the traces G41 and G51.

In this case also, when the back cover 22 is molded, if the first to third resins g1 to g3 from the first to third resin pouring portions G1 to G3 are poured substantially at the same time, the same as in the twelfth embodiment can be achieved. A first weld line WL1 is generated at the junction of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3, and a second weld line WL2 is generated at the junction of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. It has the same effect.

The first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 flow through the resistance of the first and second resin flow inhibiting portions C1 and C2 as indicated by the arrows in FIG. It flows from both upper and lower sides to the center while receiving

On the other hand, the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 flows rightward as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 112 and enters between the first and second resins g1 and g2. In particular, there is a resin flow guide portion C3 below the third resin pouring portion G3, and the third resin g3 from the third resin pouring portion G3 flows rapidly through the resin flow guide portion C3 and flows into the first and second resin flow guide portions C3. Since it is inserted between the resins g1 and g2, the third resin g3 can reliably enter above the first resin g1 prior to the first resin g1 rising from the first resin pouring portion G1.

As a result, the first weld line WL1 is formed at the confluence of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3, and the second weld line WL2 is formed at the confluence of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. It occurs and has the same effect as described above.

Figures 113 and 114 illustrate the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, the rear cover 22 has a rear surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145. The rear surface portion 144 has vertical ribs 376 and horizontal ribs 377 projecting forward. A plurality of them are provided vertically and horizontally at predetermined intervals. The rear surface portion 144 has a heat radiation area 264A in its central portion and a non-heat radiation area 264B on the peripheral side of the heat radiation area 264A. The heat radiation area 264A is provided with an elongated heat radiation hole 264 extending in the left-right direction. A rib 375 protruding forward from the back surface portion 144 is provided in the left-right direction between the heat radiation region 264A and the non-heat radiation region 264B.

The rear portion 144 has first to fifth resin pouring portion traces G11, G21, G31, G41, and G51. The first to fifth resin pouring portion traces G11 to G51 correspond to the first to fifth resin pouring portions G1 to G5. The first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 are arranged on both left and right sides in the vicinity of the upper side of the horizontal rib 377a arranged on the lower side of the back surface portion 144. As shown in FIG. The third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged near the center vertical rib 376a above the middle between the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2.

In the vicinity of the third resin pouring portion G3, the third resin g3 formed vertically by the central vertical rib 376a and poured from the third resin pouring portion G3 is placed in the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G3. A resin flow guide portion C3 is provided to guide between the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from G2.

A plurality of heat radiation holes 264 are provided in the vertical direction between the central vertical rib 376a and the vertical ribs 376 on both left and right sides between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. The vertical ribs 376a on both the left and right sides and the plurality of heat radiation holes 264 on the left and right of the ribs 376a guide the resin flow of the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. First and second resin flow inhibition portions C1 and C2 are formed to inhibit flow to the C3 side.

The first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 are located near the lower horizontal ribs 377a, and the horizontal ribs 377a guide the flow of the first and second resins g1 and g2 toward the center. However, the distance from the third resin pouring portion G3 to the intersection of the horizontal rib 377a and the vertical rib 376a is the distance from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 to the intersection of the horizontal rib 377a and the vertical rib 376a. The third resin g3 flows earlier than the first and second resins g1 and g2.

In addition, the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 may be arranged at the four corners of the back portion 144, and the third resin pouring portion G3 may be arranged at the center thereof. Therefore, in that case, the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 are arranged on each side of the back portion 144, and the third resin pouring portion G3 is arranged on the center side thereof.

Even in such a configuration, when molding the back cover 22, the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 are used as the first and second resin flows. The third resin g3 from the third resin pouring part G3 enters between the first and second resins g1 and g2 while it flows toward the center from both the left and right sides while receiving the resistance of the inhibition parts C1 and C2. It will be.

Therefore, as in the twelfth embodiment, the first weld line WL1 is formed at the confluence of the first resin g1 and the third resin g3, and the second weld line WL1 is formed at the confluence of the second resin g2 and the third resin g3. WL2 is generated respectively and has the same effect as described above.

Note that the first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 become invisible when the joining angle of the first to third resins g1 to g3 becomes greater than or equal to a predetermined angle.

In the twelfth to fifteenth embodiments, the back cover 22 is exemplified as a game component, but it is not limited to protective covers such as the back cover 22, and various game components can be implemented in the same way. The resin flow guide portion can be constituted by a thick portion formed in a part of the back cover 22 in the direction of resin flow, ribs formed in the direction of resin flow, and the like. 22, a thin portion crossing the direction of resin flow in a part of the back cover 22, ribs crossing the direction of resin flow, and the like.

Figures 115-119 illustrate the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 115, the back cover 22 has a flat plate-shaped back portion 144 that protects the display substrate case 134, the liquid crystal substrate case 136, the main substrate case 138, etc., which constitute the exothermic back member, and the back portion 144. and a peripheral wall portion 145 that bends forward from the outer periphery to protect the substrate cases 134, 136 and the like from the outer peripheral side. The peripheral wall portion 145 has left and right curved portions 145a with a long forward projection amount and short curved portions 145b.

The rear portion 144 has an upper heat dissipation area 264A and a non-heat dissipation area 264B below the heat dissipation area 264A. The heat radiation area 264A includes a heat radiation hole group 264U in which a large number of round heat radiation holes 264d are arranged vertically and horizontally, and a heat radiation hole group 264D in which a large number of vertically elongated heat radiation holes (openings) 264 are arranged in the horizontal direction. and are provided. The heat dissipation hole group 264D includes two rows (multiple rows) of heat dissipation hole rows 264E in which a large number of heat dissipation holes 264 are arranged in the horizontal direction.

The back cover 22 is an example of a game part, and the heat radiation hole 264 is an example of an opening, but the game part may be something other than the back cover 22, and the opening may be something other than the heat radiation hole 264 .

In the back surface portion 144, first and second resin pouring portion traces G11 and G21 are formed in the heat radiation area 264A or its periphery, such as on both sides of the diagonal line in the horizontal and vertical directions with respect to the heat radiation hole group 264D. A resin flow guide portion C3 is provided in the lateral direction along the heat dissipation region 264A in the vicinity of the heat dissipation region 264A side of the non-heat dissipation region 264B.

The traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 where the resin was poured into the molding space of the mold when the back cover 22 was molded. is molded by pouring resin from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 substantially simultaneously.

The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged on the upper side of the non-radiation region 264B in the vicinity of the lower side of the heat radiation hole group 264D and corresponding to the left end side thereof. The second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged between the heat dissipation hole group 264U and the heat dissipation hole group 264D so as to correspond to the right end side of the heat dissipation region 264A.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the resin flow guide portion C3 is composed of reinforcing ribs 375 integrally projecting forward from the back surface portion 144. The cross-sectional area is large so that it can easily flow into the water.

In a heat radiation hole group 264D formed by a large number of heat radiation holes 264, FIG. 119 shows the surroundings of two or three heat radiation holes 264 in the substantially central portion between the left and right first and second resin pouring portion traces G11 and G21. Thus, first to third confluence portions R1 to R3 are formed where the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 join. At the first to third confluence portions R1 to R3, the confluence positions of the first and second resins g1 and g2 are deviated in the resin flow direction to generate first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3. ing.

At the first junction R1 between the upper and lower heat radiation holes 264a and 264b, the first and second resins g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 join from both left and right sides. 2. The first weld line is located at a position corresponding to the difference in shape and/or structure from the resin pouring parts G1 and G2 to the confluence position, that is, the resin flow conditions such as the resin flow resistance of the first and second resins g1 and g2. WL1 is generated in the vertical direction.

At the second junction R2 between the left and right heat dissipation holes 264b and 264c, the first and second resins g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 join from both upper and lower sides. The second weld is located at a position corresponding to the difference in shape and/or structure from the second resin pouring parts G1, G2 to the joining position, that is, the resin flow conditions such as the resin flow resistance of the first and second resins g1, g2. A line WL2 is generated in the horizontal direction.

Furthermore, at the third junction R3 between the lower heat radiation hole 264c and the resin flow guide portion C3, the first and second resins g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 flow from both left and right sides. Because of the confluence, the difference in shape and/or structure from the first and second resin pouring parts G1 and G2 to the confluence position, that is, the resin flow conditions such as the resin flow resistance of the first and second resins g1 and g2. A third weld line WL3 is generated at the corresponding position. In particular, the third weld line WL3 is influenced by the resin flow guide portion C3 located in the vicinity of the lower portion of the first and second resin pouring portions G1, and the lower side of the third weld line WL3 is inclined downward to the right.

This is for the following reasons. That is, when the first and second resins g1 and g2 are poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2, the first and second resins g1 and g2 flow from the left and right sides toward the center to meet the flow resistance of the mold. , and merge at the first to third junctions R1 to R3 between the heat radiation holes 264a to 264c. The confluence position of the first and second resins g1 and g2 at the first to third confluence portions R1 to R3 is the confluence of the first to third confluence portions R1 to R3 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. It is determined by the flow conditions such as the flow velocity ratio of the first and second resins g1 and g2 up to the position.

Between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 to the merging positions of the first to third merging portions R1 to R3, the number, direction, interval, path length, etc. of the heat dissipation holes 264 on the way are determined. The shape and/or structure is different, and accordingly the resin flow conditions from the first resin pouring part G1 to the first to third confluence parts R1 to R3 are different, and from the second resin pouring part G2 to the first resin pouring part G2. Since the resin flow conditions are different up to the third junctions R1 to R3, the first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are formed in the first to third junctions R1 to R3 due to the differences in the resin flow conditions. Occurs with deviation.

In particular, since the resin flow guide portion C3 is located near the lower side of the third confluence portion R3, the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 flows rightward through the resin flow guide portion C3 and its surroundings. do. On the other hand, the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 flows leftward through the resin flow guide portion C3 and its periphery.

In this case, the first resin pouring portion G1 is located near the resin flow guide portion C3, and the second resin pouring portion G2 is located farther from the resin flow guide portion C3 than the first resin pouring portion G1. The first resin g1 from the resin pouring part G1 accelerates to the right through the resin flow guide part C3 at a faster flow rate than the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring part G2 (the first resin g1 >flow velocity of the second resin g2).

As a result, the third weld line WL3 generated at the third confluence R3 moves rightward under the influence of the flow velocity of the first resin g1. Since it can be displaced in the direction of resin flow relative to WL1 and WL2, the strength of the back cover 22 is improved.

That is, around the heat dissipation holes 264b and 264c, first to second resins formed by joining the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring part G2 are formed. There are 3 weld lines WL1 to WL3. The first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are deviated in the resin flow direction because the shape and/or structure from the first resin pouring portion mark G11 to the first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are different. This is because the shapes and/or structures from the traces of the second resin pouring portion G21 to the first to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are different.

Figures 120-123 illustrate a twentieth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, the back cover 22 has a flat back portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145 bent forward from the outer periphery of the back portion 144 . The peripheral wall portion 145 integrally includes bent portions 145a and 145b that bend forward from the left and right sides, an upper bent portion 145c that bends forward from the upper side, and an upright portion 145d that rises upward from the front end of the upper bent portion 145c. prepared for. The upper end of the back surface portion 144 is lowered from one end side to the other end side in the left-right direction, and an upper bent portion 145c that bends forward from the upper end side is provided. The upper bent portion 145c may have substantially the same front-to-rear width in the left-right direction, or may have different front-to-rear widths.

A heat radiation hole group 264D having a large number of heat radiation holes 264 is provided in the rear portion 144 and the upper bent portion 145c. On the upper end side of the back surface portion 144, traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are formed on both left and right sides.

The traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 where the resin was poured into the molding space of the mold when the back cover 22 was molded. is molded by pouring resin from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 substantially simultaneously.

The first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 when molding the back cover 22 pass through the heat dissipation holes 264 and enter the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. It flows while diffusing substantially concentrically around the , joins and fills the entire molding space of the mold, but flows toward the standing portion 145d at the front end of the upper bent portion 145c. The resins g1 and g2 are guided by the upright portion 145d and flow in the left-right direction while increasing the flow velocity.

For example, when looking at the periphery of two upper and lower heat radiation holes 264a and 264b located between the left and right first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2, the resin is poured from the left and right first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. The first and second resins g1 and g2 form a first junction R1 between the upper and lower heat radiation holes 264a and 264b and a second junction between the upper heat radiation hole 264a and the upright portion 145d on the side of the upper bent portion 145c. The first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 are formed in the first and second confluence portions R1 and R2 at the confluence positions according to the resin flow conditions.

In the first confluence portion R1, the length of the flow path from the left and right first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 to the confluence position and the resin flow conditions such as the peripheral conditions of the flow path are substantially the same. The first and second resins g1 and g2 from both the left and right sides join at the joining position approximately in the center between the first and second resin pouring parts G1 and G2, and the first weld line WL1 generated by the joining is It is formed vertically between the upper and lower heat radiation holes 264a and 264b.

On the other hand, on the second joining portion R2 side, the first and second resins g1 and g2 from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 flow between the heat dissipation hole 264a and the heat dissipation holes 264c and 264d on both sides of the heat dissipation hole 264a. However, the merging position becomes obliquely inclined toward the second resin pouring part G2 as it approaches the standing portion 145d, and a second weld line WL2 is generated at the merging position.

That is, when the merging state of the first and second resins g1 and g2 on the side of the second merging portion R2 is observed, in the vicinity of the upper heat radiation hole 264a, the heat radiation hole 264a and the heat radiation holes 264c and 264d on both sides of the heat radiation hole 264a are separated from each other. Since the first and second resins g1 and g2 that have passed through the gap flow and merge under substantially the same conditions, they merge at a position slightly deviated toward the second resin pouring portion G2 according to the flow conditions.

However, the upper bent portion 145c has an upright portion 145d on the tip side, and a portion with a large cross-sectional area on the base side functions as a resin flow guide portion C3. The first and second resins g1 and g2 immediately after being applied flow to the resin flow guide portion C3, and then are guided by the resin flow guide portion C3 and flow in the left-right direction while increasing the flow velocity.

Comparing the distance from the first resin pouring portion G1 to the resin flow guide portion C3 with the distance from the second resin pouring portion G2 to the resin flow guide portion C3, as shown in FIGS. The longitudinal dimension L3 of 145c is substantially the same, but the vertical dimension L1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 to the upper bent portion 145c is the vertical dimension from the second resin pouring portion G2 to the upper bent portion 145c. It is smaller than L2.

Therefore, among the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at substantially the same time, the first resin g1 flows into the resin flow guide portion C3 earlier than the second resin g2. The first and second resins g1 and g2 flow rapidly toward the second confluence portion R2 while being guided by the resin flow guide portion C3. The flow velocity of the first resin g1>the flow velocity of the second resin g2.

As a result, the confluence position of the first and second resins g1 and g2 that merge from the left and right sides on the second confluence portion R2 side of the upper bent portion 145c flows toward the second confluence portion R2 side in the resin flow guide portion C3. As it gets closer to the upright portion 145d, it inclines toward the second resin pouring portion G2, and correspondingly, the second weld line WL2 is generated.

Therefore, if there are first and second junctions R1 and R2 across the upper heat radiation hole 264a, first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated at the first and second junctions R1 and R2. , the flow velocity of the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing to the first and second confluence portions R1 and R2 through the resin flow guide portion C3, and other flow conditions, the position of the second weld line WL2 is changed to As described above, the resin flow guide portion C3 can be displaced in the resin flow direction with respect to the first weld line WL1.

Figures 124 and 125 illustrate the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, the back cover 22 has a flat back surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145 that bends forward from the outer circumference of the back surface portion 144 . The rear portion 144 has a projection 144X projecting downward. The rear surface portion 144 has a heat radiation area 264A, and a large number of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 264 are provided in the heat radiation area 264A. A plurality of heat radiation holes 264 form a heat radiation hole array 264E, and a plurality of heat radiation hole arrays 264E are provided in the vertical direction.

The rear portion 144 has first and second resin pouring portion traces G11 and G21. The traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 where the resin was poured into the molding space of the mold when the back cover 22 was molded. is molded by pouring the first and second resins g1 and g2 substantially simultaneously from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2.

The first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin pouring part G2 are arranged at the lower left part and the upper right part of the rear part 144, respectively. A peripheral wall portion 145 on the right side from the lower side of the back surface portion 144 constitutes a resin flow guide portion C3 that guides the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2.

The first resin pouring part G1 is arranged near the resin flow guide part C3, and the second resin pouring part G2 is placed farther from the resin flow guide part C3 than the first resin pouring part G1. When molding the back cover 22, the first and second resins g1 and g2 are poured from the first and second resin pouring parts G1 and G2 to mold. As for the first and second resins g1 and g2, the first resin g1 reaches the resin flow guide portion C3 earlier than the second resin g2. Therefore, in the lower resin flow guide portion C3, the first resin g1 flows rightward and the second resin g2 flows leftward, but the first resin g1 flows rightward at a faster speed than the second resin g2. Moving.

When looking at the peripheral side of the two upper and lower heat dissipation holes 264a and 264b positioned between the first and second resin pouring parts G1 and G2, as shown in FIG. and the heat radiation hole 264b of the lower heat radiation hole row 264E, and the second junction R2 between the heat radiation hole 264b of the lower heat radiation hole row 264E and the resin flow guide portion C3. First and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated at the first and second junctions R1 and R2, respectively.

In the resin flow guide portion C3 on the lower side, the second weld line WL2 is defined by the difference in flow velocity between the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing in the resin flow guide portion C3 ( Flow velocity>flow velocity of the second resin g2), the resin flow guide portion C3 can be deviated in the resin flow direction with respect to the first weld line WL1.

Figures 126-128 illustrate a twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the rear cover 22 has a rear surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145 that bends from the outer peripheral side of the rear surface portion 144 to the front side. The peripheral wall portion 145 has, on the left and right, a first peripheral wall portion 145a that greatly bends forward and a second peripheral wall portion 145b that slightly bends forward. A heat radiation area 264A extends from the rear surface portion 144 to the rear end side of the first peripheral wall portion 145a. A long hole-shaped heat radiation hole 2642 extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear end side. At the rear end side of the first peripheral wall portion 145a, a bent portion 145e that bends a plurality of times is provided in the vertical direction, and the bent portion 145e constitutes the resin flow guide portion C3.

First and second resin pouring portion traces G11 and G21 are provided on one side portion of the back surface portion 144 near the first peripheral wall portion 145a. First and second resin pouring part traces G11 and G21 are traces of the first and second resin pouring parts G1 and G2 at the time of molding. The resin pouring part G2 is arranged at the upper left part of the back part 144, respectively. The first resin pouring portion G1 is arranged near the resin flow guide portion C3, and the second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged far from the resin flow guide portion C3.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 128, a first heat dissipating hole 2641 on the left side of the rear surface portion 144 and a heat dissipating hole 2642 on the rear end side of the first peripheral wall portion 145a are surrounded by a first heat dissipating hole 2641 and 2642. The confluence R1 has a second confluence R2 on the resin flow guide portion C3 side of the heat dissipation hole 2642, and the first and second confluences R1 and R2 generate first and second weld lines WL1 and WL2. there is

A first weld line WL1 is formed in the horizontal direction between the heat radiation holes 2641 and 2642. As shown in FIG. In the same manner as described above, the second weld line WL2 is located at the resin flow guide portion C3 with respect to the first weld line WL1 due to the difference in flow velocity between the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing in the resin flow guide portion C3. It is deviated in the resin flow direction. This is because the first resin pouring portion G1 is closer to the resin flow guide portion C3 than the second resin pouring portion G2. Due to the difference (flow velocity of the first resin g1>flow velocity of the second resin g2), the second weld line WL2 can be deviated from the first weld line WL1 in the resin flow direction of the resin flow guide portion C3.

Figures 129 and 130 illustrate the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the rear cover 22 has a rear surface portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145. The peripheral wall portion 145 is a first bending wall 1451 that bends forward from the upper end of the rear surface portion 144, and this and a second curved wall 1452 that curves upward from the front end of the first curved wall 1451 . Long hole-shaped heat radiation holes 264 extending in the left-right direction are provided vertically and horizontally in the back surface portion 144 . The back surface portion 144 has a first resin pouring portion mark G1 corresponding to the first resin pouring portion G1 on the upper left, and a second resin pouring portion G2 corresponding to the second resin pouring portion G2 below the first resin pouring portion G1 on the right side. There is a trace G21 of the second resin pouring portion.

In the upper part of the back cover 22, there are a first resin flow guide portion C3-1 constituted by a bent portion 1453 of the back portion 144 and the first bent wall 1451, and a first bent wall 1451 and a second bent wall 1452. A second resin flow guide portion C3-2 constituted by a bent portion 1454 is provided in the left-right direction. The first resin pouring part G1 is arranged near the first and second resin flow guides C3-1 and C3-2, and the second resin pouring part G2 is arranged near the first and second resin flow guides C3-1 and C3. It is placed far away from -2.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the peripheral portion of the heat radiation holes 264a and 264b on the upper side of the rear surface portion 144, there is a first junction R1 between the heat radiation holes 264a and 264b, and the heat radiation hole 264a and the first resin flow guide portion C3. -1, and there is a third confluence R3 between the first resin flow guide C3-1 and the second resin flow guide C3-2. First to third weld lines WL1 to WL3 are generated at the junctions R1 to R3.

As described above, the second weld line WL2 is the first weld line WL1 with respect to the first weld line WL1 due to the difference in flow velocity between the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing in the first resin flow guide portion C3-1. It can be deviated in the resin flow direction of the resin flow guide portion C3-1. In addition, the third weld line WL3 is the same as the above, because of the difference in flow velocity between the first and second resins g1 and g2 flowing in the second resin flow guide portion C3-2, the 2 It is possible to deviate in the resin flow direction of the resin flow guide portion C3-2.

FIG. 131 illustrates the twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 131, the back cover 22 has a back portion 144 and a peripheral wall portion 145. Ribs 379 and 380 are provided in the back portion 144 vertically and horizontally. A plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 are provided in the region 264A. The rear portion 144 has first resin pouring portion traces G11 corresponding to the first resin pouring portion G1 at the four corners, and second resin pouring portion traces G21 corresponding to the second resin pouring portion G2 at the center thereof. .

For example, in relation to the lower left first resin pouring portion G1, the lateral rib 380a near the first resin pouring portion G1 constitutes the resin flow guide portion C3. On the other hand, the second resin pouring portion G2 is connected to the resin flow guide portion C3 via a vertical rib 379a in the vicinity thereof.

As shown in FIG. 131, there is a first junction R1 between the upper and lower heat radiation holes 264a and 264b in the periphery of the heat radiation holes 264a and 264b on the lower side of the rear surface portion 144. There is a second junction R2 between the flow guide portion C3. First and second weld lines WL1 and WL2 are generated at the first and second junctions R1 and R2.

As described above, the second weld line WL2 consists of the first resin g1 flowing rightward in the first resin flow guide portion C3 and the second resin g2 flowing leftward in the first resin flow guide portion C3. Due to the difference in flow velocity between the first weld line WL1 and the first weld line WL1, the resin flow guide portion C3 can be displaced in the resin flow direction.

In the sixteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first and second resins g1 and g2 poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 reach the first and second confluence portions R1 and R2. The resin flow conditions up to the first and second resin pouring parts G1, G2, etc., to the first and second merging parts R1, R2, in addition to the magnitude of the resistance of the route portion, the magnitude of the volume of the peripheral portion of the route, It is determined in relation to the size of the path length and the like.

Figures 132-135 illustrate a twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the back cover 22 includes a back portion 144 that protects the internal effect board case 134, liquid crystal board case 136, main board case 138, etc. It has an outer peripheral wall 145 that bends toward.

The rear part 144 has a heat dissipation area 264A corresponding to the effect board case 134, the liquid crystal board case 136, etc., and a non-heat dissipation area 264B corresponding to the main board case 138. The heat dissipation area 264A has heat dissipation holes in the horizontal direction. A plurality of columns 264D are provided vertically. A plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 264 are arranged in the horizontal direction in each heat radiation hole row 264D. Also, the non-heat-dissipating region 264B is non-porous.

The effect board case 134 houses the effect board 133, the liquid crystal board case 136 houses the liquid crystal board 135, and the main board case 138 houses the main board 137. Each board 133, 135, 137 contains an integrated circuit device and other components. electronic components are installed. On the back side of the main board case 138, a board information display means 391 made up of a sticking sheet or the like is provided.

As shown in FIG. 134, the circuit board information display means 391 is provided with a two-dimensional code 393 indicating the control number of the main circuit board 137 and a number display section 394, as well as an opening/closing history notation indicating the opening/closing history of the main circuit board case 138. A section 395 is provided. The opening/closing history description section 395 is provided with three upper and lower sets, each of which includes an opener description field and an opening date description field.

A visual recognition portion 396 is provided in the non-heat radiation area 264B of the rear surface portion 144 corresponding to the substrate information display means 391. Predetermined information such as is visible. The visible part 396 constitutes a specific part where the weld line WL generated when the back cover 22 is molded is to be avoided.

In this embodiment, the back cover 22 constitutes a game component (protective cover) made of resin, and the main circuit board case 138 arranged to face the rear portion 144 of the back cover 22 constitutes a facing component. A viewing portion 396 constituting a specific portion is provided on the back portion 144 of the back cover 22 corresponding to the board information display means 391 on the side of the main board case 138 . The board information display means 391 on the side of the main board case 138 may be used as the specific part.

The effect board case 134 and the liquid crystal board case 136 constitute back members, and the effect board 133 and the liquid crystal board 135 inside thereof are provided with exothermic electronic components and the like, and constitute exothermic members or exothermic back members.

The rear portion 144 has first and second resin pouring portion traces G11 and G21 on its lower side, and also has one or more resin pouring portion traces (not shown) on its upper side. The first resin pouring portion trace G11 corresponds to the first resin pouring portion G1 in the lower portion of the heat dissipation region 264A, and the second resin pouring portion trace G21 corresponds to the second resin pouring portion G2 at the corner of the non-heat dissipation region 264B. there is

A resin flow guide portion C3 is provided in the left-right direction along the lower side of the heat dissipation area 264A in the non-heat dissipation area 264B in the vicinity of the lower side of the heat dissipation area 264A. The resin flow guide portion C3 has a larger cross-sectional area than the other portions, and is composed of ribs 397 projecting forward from the back surface portion 144, so that the flow resistance is small and the molten resin can easily flow. there is In addition, the rear cover 22 extends upward, and a resin pouring portion or the like is also provided in the heat dissipation area 264A in the upper portion thereof.

The first resin pouring part G1 is located in the lowest heat radiation hole row 264D of the heat radiation area 264A, and a large number of heat radiation holes 264 are arranged near the upper side thereof, and the resin flow guide part C3 is adjacent to the lower side. are arranged as follows. The second resin pouring portion G2 is arranged at a position greatly spaced downward from the resin flow guide portion C3.

The first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin pouring part G2 are arranged on both sides of the visual recognition part 396, which is the specific part. Above the first resin pouring portion G1, a flow obstructing portion 398 is provided to obstruct the upward flow of the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1. This flow obstruction portion 398 is composed of a large number of heat radiation holes 264 .

When molding the back cover 22, the first and second resins g1 and g2 are poured substantially simultaneously from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 for molding. At this time, since there is a flow obstruction portion 398 composed of a large number of heat radiation holes 264 above the periphery of the first resin pouring portion G1, as shown in FIG. inhibits upward flow of the first resin g1 from the As a result, the flow rate of the first resin g1 flowing downward from the first resin pouring portion G1 relatively increases.

When the flow rate of the first resin g1 to the lower side increases, the first resin g1 flows toward the second resin pouring portion G2 through the resin flow guide portion C3. The flow velocity of the first resin g1 to the side becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 that flows from the second resin pouring part G2 and spreads concentrically toward the first resin pouring part G1.

In particular, since there is a flow obstruction portion 398 above the first resin pouring portion G1 and a resin flow guide portion C3 is below the first resin pouring portion G1, the resin flows downward through the heat dissipation holes 264 on the side of the heat dissipation region 264A. The first resin g1 flows easily into the resin flow guide portion C3, and spreads vertically while rapidly flowing rightward along the resin flow guide portion C3.

Therefore, although the first and second resins g1 and g2 are poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at approximately the same pressure, the flow velocity of the first resin g1 flowing to the right side is It becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 flowing leftward while diffusing over the entire circumference of the portion G2. Due to the difference in flow speed (flow speed of the first resin g1>flow speed of the second resin g2), the confluence position of the first resin g1 and the second resin g2 is between the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2. It will move greatly from the center to the second resin pouring part G2 side, and a weld line WL is generated at the confluence position.

Accordingly, there is a relatively large board information display means 391 on the side of the main board case 138 corresponding to the intermediate portion between the first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin pouring part G2. Even if the rear surface portion 144 of the back cover 22 has the visible portion 396, the weld line WL can be generated at a position deviated from the visible portion 396 toward the second resin pouring portion G2. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the weld line WL from overlapping the visible portion 396 .

Figures 136-138 illustrate a twenty-sixth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the back cover 22 includes a back portion 144 for protecting the interior effect board case 134, liquid crystal board case 136, main board case 138, etc. It has an outer peripheral wall 145 that bends toward. The outer peripheral wall 145 has a first outer peripheral wall 145a that greatly bends forward from one side in the left-right direction, and a second outer peripheral wall 145b that slightly bends forward from the other side in the left-right direction.

The rear portion 144 is provided with a heat radiation area 264A on the upper side and a non-heat radiation area 264B on the lower side. The heat radiation area 264A extends from the rear end side of the first outer peripheral wall 145a to the rear end side of the second outer peripheral wall 145b. 401 are provided vertically, and on the rear end side of the first outer peripheral wall 145a and the second outer peripheral wall 145b, heat radiation hole rows 404 and 405 formed by elongated long hole-shaped heat radiation holes 402 and 403 are aligned vertically. are provided in the form of

The non-heat radiation area 264B corresponds to the back side of the main substrate case 138 that accommodates the main substrate 137. The non-heat radiation area 264B includes a viewing window 406, a first resin pouring portion trace G11, and a second resin pouring portion trace G21. and are provided. A viewing window 406 has a rectangular opening and is arranged at the upper left corner of the non-radiation area 264B corresponding to the board information display means 391 on the back of the main board case 138 .

Traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at the time of molding. The first resin pouring part G1 is arranged between the upper heat radiation hole row 401, the left heat radiation hole row 404, and the visual window 406 in the upper left part of the non-heat radiation area 264B. The upper heat radiation hole row 401, the left heat radiation hole row 404, and the lower visual window 406 constitute flow obstruction portions 407 to 409 for the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1.

The upper radiation hole row 401 and the lower visual window 406 function as flow obstruction portions 407 and 409 that obstruct the upward and downward flow of the first resin g1 poured from the first resin pouring portion G1. do.

On the right side of the first resin pouring portion G1 (on the side of the second resin pouring portion G2), there is a narrow passage (specific portion) 410 between the radiation hole row 401 and the visual window 406. The narrow passage 410 guides the resin flow. A part C3 is configured.

A flow obstruction portion 408 is provided on the left side of the first resin pouring portion G1 (the side opposite to the second resin pouring portion G2). Therefore, most of the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1 flows to the right through the resin flow guide portion C3.

Note that the upper heat radiation hole row 401, the left heat radiation hole row 404, and the lower viewing window 406 restrict the flow of the first resin g1 to the upper, left, and lower sides. They also function as resin guiding parts 407 to 409 that guide them to the right.

On the other hand, the second resin pouring portion G2 is located on the right side of the viewing window 406, and is arranged at a far position far below the resin flow guide portion C3.

In this case also, there are flow obstruction portions 407 to 409 in the vicinity of the first resin pouring portion G1. , to the left, the flow rate of the first resin g1 flowing to the right through the narrow passage 410 increases, as shown in FIG.

Therefore, when the back cover 22 is molded, the first and second resins g1 and g2 are poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at approximately the same pressure. The flow velocity of the resin g1 becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 flowing leftward while diffusing over the entire circumference of the second resin pouring portion G2.

Due to this flow velocity difference (flow velocity of the first resin g1>flow velocity of the second resin g2), the confluence positions of the first resin g1 and the second resin g2 are the first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin pouring part G2. and the narrow passage 410 in the middle to the second resin pouring portion G2 side, and a weld line WL is generated at the confluence position. As a result, the occurrence of weld lines WL in the narrow passage 410 can be prevented, and the mechanical strength of the back cover 22 can be improved.

Figures 139-141 illustrate a twenty-seventh embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the back cover 22 includes a back surface portion 144 that protects the interior effect board case 134, the main board case 138, etc. from the back side, and an outer peripheral wall that bends forward from the outer periphery of the back surface portion 144. 145. The rear portion 144 has a heat radiation area 264A on the upper side and a non-heat radiation area 264B on the lower side. Long hole-shaped heat radiation holes 264 extending in the left-right direction are provided vertically and horizontally in the heat radiation region 264A.

The performance board case 134 houses the performance board 133 and the main board case 138 houses the main board 137 . An electronic component 412 such as an integrated circuit device is mounted on the effect board 133, and the electronic component 412 is provided with information display means 413 such as a two-dimensional code for displaying management information.

As shown in FIG. 141, the effect board case 134 is provided with a large number of heat dissipation holes 414, but a portion corresponding to the information display means 413 is provided with a viewing portion 415 having no heat dissipation holes 414. A board information display means 391 is provided in the main board case 138 .

The non-heat radiation area 264B is provided with a non-porous visual recognition portion 417 corresponding to each information display means 413 and an open visual recognition window 418 corresponding to the board information display means 391 . In addition, the visual recognition part 417 comprises a specific part. The viewing window 418 is rectangular and has a tapered slanted opening edge 418a.

The back surface portion 144 is provided with a first resin pouring portion mark G11 near the upper side of the viewing window 418, and a second resin pouring portion G21 between the heat dissipation holes 264 in the heat dissipation region 264A. Traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are traces of the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2 at the time of molding. The traces G11 and G21 of the first and second resin pouring portions are vertically spaced apart from each other.

In the vicinity of the lower side of the first resin pouring portion G1, there is a flow obstruction portion 419 formed by a viewing window 418. This flow obstruction portion 419 prevents the first resin g1 from flowing downward from the first resin pouring portion G1. As a result, the first resin g1 flows intensively to the upper half, and the flow velocity to the upper side increases. On the other hand, the second resin pouring portion G2 is located between the heat dissipation holes 264 of the heat dissipation region 264A, and the large number of surrounding heat dissipation holes 264 impede the flow of the second resin g2 to the periphery. flow velocity slows down.

Therefore, when the first and second resins g1 and g2 are poured from the first and second resin pouring portions G1 and G2, the flow velocity of the first resin g1 flowing upward from the first resin pouring portion G1 is equal to that of the second resin becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 flowing downward from the pouring part G2, and due to the difference in flow velocity (flow velocity of the first resin g1>flow velocity of the second resin g2), the first resin g1 and the second resin g2 g2 is largely moved from the center of the first resin pouring portion G1 and the second resin pouring portion G2 toward the heat dissipation hole 264 side of the lower portion of the heat dissipation region 264A, and the weld line WL is formed at the joining position. Occur.

The weld line WL is located in a heat dissipation area 264A having a large number of heat dissipation holes 264. The first and second resins g1 and g2 are joined from both upper and lower sides to form a long hole-like heat dissipation area extending in the left and right direction. Since the direction is along the hole 264, the strength of the back cover 22 can be prevented from being significantly lowered.

Figures 142 and 143 illustrate the twenty-eighth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the rear cover 22 has a rear surface portion 144 and an outer peripheral wall 145 on the outer peripheral side thereof.

A plurality of vertical ribs 420 and horizontal ribs 421 are provided vertically and horizontally on the front side of the rear portion 144 , and a plurality of ribs 420 and horizontal ribs 421 are provided between the vertical ribs 420 and the horizontal ribs 421 in the heat radiation area 264 A on the left-right center side of the rear portion 144 . of heat dissipation holes 264 are provided. Furthermore, on the rear surface side of the back surface portion 144, there are first resin pouring portion traces G11 corresponding to the first resin pouring portion G1 on the center side, and second resin pouring portion traces G21 corresponding to the second resin pouring portion G2 on the four corners. are provided respectively. Further, on the back surface side of the back surface portion 144, an indication rib 422 is provided on the side opposite to the heat radiation hole 264 with respect to the first resin pouring portion G1, and serves as a mark of a sticking type display means 423 such as a display label.

For example, when looking at the relationship between the first resin pouring portion G1 on the central side and the second resin pouring portion G2 on the upper right side, there are vertical ribs 420, horizontal ribs 421, etc. around the second resin pouring portion G2. , there is no heat radiation hole 264, and the second resin g2 from the second resin pouring portion G2 is diffused substantially uniformly over the entire circumference.

On the other hand, around the first resin pouring part G1, there are a large number of heat dissipation holes 264 in approximately three directions, namely, the upper side, the left side and the lower side, so that the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring part G1 can be diffused in three directions. Since the flow obstructing portions 424 to 426 are formed, the flow rate of the first resin g1 to the right increases.

A vertical rib 420a is located near the right side of the first resin pouring portion G1. Since the upper side portion 422a of the instruction rib 422 is positioned at the upper side portion 422a of the instruction rib 422, the vertical rib 420a, the horizontal rib 421a, and the upper side portion 422a of the instruction rib 422 guide the flow of the first resin g1 from the first resin pouring portion G1. It constitutes part C3.

Therefore, the first resin g1 poured from the first resin pouring portion G1 during molding of the back cover 22 receives the blocking action of the flow blocking portions 424 to 426 and flows in large quantities toward the resin flow guide portion C3. Through this resin flow guide portion C3, the resin rapidly flows toward the second resin pouring portion G2.

In this case also, the flow velocity of the first resin g1 flowing to the right becomes faster than the flow velocity of the second resin g2 flowing to the left while diffusing over the entire circumference, and the difference in flow velocity (the flow velocity of the first resin g1 Flow velocity>flow velocity of the second resin g2), the confluence position of the first resin g1 and the second resin g2 is from the center of the first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin pouring part G2 to the second resin pouring part G2 side. , and a weld line WL is generated at the confluence position.

Therefore, when there is a heat dissipation hole 264 in the vicinity of the middle between the first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin pouring part G2, if a large weld line WL is formed in the vicinity of the heat dissipation hole 264, the mechanical strength of the back cover 22 is improved. However, the strength of the back cover 22 can be easily ensured by moving the weld line WL to a position away from the vicinity of the heat radiation hole 264 (specific portion).

The same applies to the relationship between the first resin pouring part G1 and the second resin pouring part G2 on the lower right side.

Although each embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to each embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the invention. Although the pachinko machine is exemplified in the embodiment, the game machine 1 other than the pachinko machine, such as a pinball game machine and an arrange ball machine, can also be implemented in the same manner.

A plurality of back members arranged on the back side of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3 and a back cover 22 for protecting at least one back member of the plurality of back members are provided, and the back cover 22 is opened within a predetermined angle. A game machine 1 which is openable and detachable is provided with regulating means 149, 294, 295 for regulating removal of the back cover 22 when the opening angle of the back cover 22 is less than a predetermined angle, and the back cover 22 is regulated. It may be removable after deregulation by the means 149 .

In that case, the hinge means 21 for supporting the back cover 22 so that it can be opened/closed and detached may be provided, and the restricting means 149 , 294 , 295 may be arranged in the vicinity of the hinge means 21 and/or provided in the hinge means 21 . Further, on the upper side of the back cover 22, a ball tank 48 for storing game balls and a guide rail 49 for guiding the game balls from the ball tank 48 to the payout means 23 are provided. / Or it may consist of guide rails 49 .

A plurality of back members arranged on the back sides of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3 and a back cover 22 for protecting at least one of the plurality of back members are provided, and the back cover 22 is a hinge shaft made of resin. 147, and the back cover 22 can be opened and closed by inserting the hinge shaft 147 into the hinge bearing 148 on the game machine main body 2, 3 side. It may be provided with a recess 167 that is recessed into.

In that case, the recess 167 may be elongated in the axial direction of the hinge shaft 147 . The hinge shaft 147 may have a substantially U-shaped cross-sectional shape in the direction across the recess 167 . Hinge shaft 147 has an oval, elliptical, or the like shape having a major diameter portion 147A and a minor diameter portion 147B. When hinge shaft 147 is inserted into hinge bearing 148 and rotated from a first angle to a second angle, At least one of the major diameter portions 147A may not contact the inner wall of the hinge bearing 148 at the first angle, and the major diameter portion 147A may contact the inner wall of the hinge bearing 148 at the second angle.

The hinge shaft 147 has a cantilever shape integrated with the back cover 22 on one end side of the hinge shaft 147 in the axial direction, and the other end side of the hinge shaft 147 has an insertion head (insertion end portion) for closing the recess 167 . ) 166. The hinge shaft 147 may be supported on both sides integrally with the back cover 22 at both axial ends of the hinge shaft 147 .

In a game machine 1 having a first resin member that a player can contact and a second resin member that a player cannot contact, the number of traces of the resin pouring portion when molding the first resin member is N1 (N1≧ 1), and the number of traces of resin-injected portions during molding of the second resin member may be N1+n1 (n1≧1).

In that case, the first resin member is a cover body of the operating means that can be operated by the player, and the second resin member is a back cover 22 that protects the back member arranged on the back side of the game machine main bodies 2 and 3. may be The back cover 22 has a body portion 68 provided with a flow obstructing portion of the molten resin, and an operation top portion continuously formed on the upper end side of the body portion 68. Traces of the resin pouring portion may be arranged. Further, the flow obstruction portion may be a pair of notch portions 68a that are arranged opposite to each other in the radial direction of the trunk portion 68 and that are recessed from the edge of the trunk portion 68 toward the operation top portion side.

As a specific example of the first resin member that can be contacted by the player, the cover body of the operating means has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower cover 62 covering the outer peripheral side of the upper plate 52 and the lower plate 61, the resin portion of the movable effect means 97, and the like may correspond to the first resin member.

However, it is not suitable from the viewpoint of cost-effectiveness to make all the resin parts that can be touched by the player to be the first resin members. Therefore, among the resin portions that can be contacted by the gaming machine, the number of resin pouring portions may be divided into N1 pieces, N1+n1 pieces or more. For example, (i) resin parts that may be violently touched (pulled or hit hard) such as handles and operating means, (ii) upper and lower trays that may come into contact during the game (iii) a resin portion that is not expected to come into contact with movable effect means or the like provided in the game machine frame, but that would hinder the game if intentionally destroyed; (iv) Considering "possibility of contact" and "influence in the event of destruction", such as other resin parts, N1 pieces for those judged to have a high possibility and influence, otherwise For those determined to be N1+n1 or more, the number may be set to N1+n1.

To illustrate the combinations, the above (i) alone is N1, the (i) and (ii) are N1, the (i), (ii) and (iii) are N1, the above ( It is conceivable that i) and (iii) are set to N1, and only the above (iii) is set to N1.

It is also possible to consider the possibility of breakage from another point of view. In other words, there is a risk that the gaming machine may be damaged not only by contact by the player, but also by the actions of the store clerk. Of course, there is no intentional attempt to destroy or damage it, but there are cases where it is negligently damaged at various times, such as during assembly, installation, maintenance during business hours or outside business hours.

Therefore, based on the degree of possibility of breakage due to negligence on the part of the store clerk, those with a high probability may be regarded as the first resin member. For example, when considering the size of damage on the premise that the game machine falls over during installation, the damage to the back side of the game machine cannot be seen by the player, so there is no impact on functionality, and it is simply aesthetic. There is no particular problem if the damage (scratches, etc.) is to the extent that it is damaged.

However, if the front side of the game machine is damaged, it does not give a good impression to the player even if the function is not affected at all. Therefore, when the game machine falls over on the front side, a higher strength is required for the parts (for example, the upper tray unit, the handle, etc.) that first touch the ground due to the unevenness. The resin portion at such a location may be used as the first resin member.

In addition, not limited to this, assuming "contact when opening the door" during maintenance, the part that may come into contact with the next table first (for example, the left end or right end, or the amount of protrusion) large portion, etc.) may correspond to the first resin member.

If the protective cover that protects the heat-generating backing member is provided with a plurality of heat radiation holes that are elongated in the vertical direction and that radiate heat from the heat-generating backing member to the outside, the heat radiation holes are provided in the plate of the protective cover. The structure has a first outwardly spreading portion and a second outwardly spreading portion which are formed in an outwardly spreading shape in the direction opposite to the plate thickness direction from the boundary portion in the middle of the thickness direction, but the boundary portion is the plate thickness of the protective cover. Anywhere in the middle of the direction is fine.

Also, although a performance board case for housing the performance board is exemplified as the heat-generating backing member, heat-generating electronic components or the like may be used as long as they are provided on the back side of the game machine. The protective cover that protects the heat-generating back member is a back cover when the heat-generating back member is a presentation board case or the like, but it may be other than the back cover depending on the heat-generating back member to be protected.

The heat radiation hole has a larger diameter on the side opposite to the heat-generating back member than the heat-generating back member side. It is also possible to make the side diameter smaller. When the diameter of the heat radiation hole on the side opposite to the heat-generating backing member is made larger than the diameter on the side of the heat-generating backing member, it is desirable to make the diameter of the heat radiation hole large in the circumferential direction. However, the diameter of the heat radiation hole on the side opposite to the heat-generating backing member may be larger than the diameter of the heat-generating backing member side, and even if only a small part in the circumferential direction has the same diameter or a smaller diameter, the whole , as long as it has a substantially large diameter.

A game machine comprising a front door pivoted to a game machine frame via hinge means so as to be openable and closable, and locking means for locking the front door to the game machine frame in a closed state, wherein the front door is locked by the locking means. When providing a front door stopping means for stopping the front door at a stop position near the front side of the game machine frame when unlocked, the front door stopping means moves the front door to the game machine frame when the front door is unlocked. Any structure or the like may be used as long as it has a function of stopping at a stop position near the front side.

In general, if a front door stopping means configured to receive the front door from below by a receiving member provided at the bottom of the game machine frame is used, there is an advantage that the structure can be simplified. It is also possible to adopt engaging means for stopping the front door by engaging the front door at a stop position near the front side of the door. The half-open position of the front door is appropriate for the stop position of the front door. Any position where contact does not pose a problem is acceptable.

A trace of a first resin pouring part corresponding to the first resin pouring part, a trace of a second resin pouring part corresponding to the second resin pouring part, and a trace of a third resin pouring part corresponding to the third resin pouring part are provided. When resin-made game parts such as the back cover and the resin poured into the molding space from each resin pouring part thereof are merged and molded, traces of the first resin pouring part, traces of the second resin pouring part, and third resin pouring The traces are arranged so that the resin poured from the third resin pouring part is inserted between the resin poured from the first resin pouring part and the resin poured from the second resin pouring part. The conditions may be met from the position where the resin pouring part should be arranged, or the conditions may be met from the magnitude of the flow resistance of the resin from each resin pouring part. The flow resistance in the direction in which the resin from the first and second resin pouring portions joins may be increased, and the flow resistance in the direction in which the resin from the third resin pouring portion joins may be decreased.

A back cover having a large number of heat dissipation holes is exemplified as a resin-made game part having openings, but a protective cover other than the back cover and other items having openings can also be used. good. Also, the number of openings may be singular or plural. For example, the game part may have the first and second confluences on both sides of a single opening.

In the case of a heat radiation hole having a relatively small opening, there is at least a first confluence part around the heat radiation hole where the resin from the first resin pouring part and the resin from the second resin pouring part join. and a second confluence, but if the size of the opening becomes large or the shape of the opening becomes complicated, the first to third confluences may form around the opening. . Even in that case, it can be implemented in the same way.

When molding a game part by merging the resins poured from a plurality of resin pouring parts in the molding space, when setting the merging position to a position away from a specific part, the resin poured from the first and second resin pouring parts However, depending on the shape, structure, etc. of the game parts, the merging of the resin from the first to third resin pouring parts from three directions may be a problem.

Also, when the relationship between the confluence of the resins from the two resin pouring parts of the first and second resin pouring parts and the specific part becomes a problem, the first and second resin pouring parts are arranged to sandwich the specific part. Alternatively, the first and second resin pouring portions may be arranged on the same side with respect to the specific portion with a space therebetween.

A first board case 138 made of resin that houses a main board 137 for controlling game operations and a second board case 134 made of resin that houses a board different from the main board 137 are provided on the back side of the game machine bodies 2 and 3. In the gaming machine 1 having at least The number may be N2+n2 (n2≧0).

In this case, it is desirable that the rear wall portion (rear surface portion) 180a of the first substrate case 138 protrudes further to the rear side than the rear wall portion (rear surface portion) 201a of the second substrate case 134 . A back cover 22 made of resin that protects at least the first board case 138 and the second board case 134 is provided. 134 is the second region, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in the first region is N3 (N3≧1), and the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 in the second region is N3+n3 (n3≧1). ).

A back cover 22 made of resin that protects the second board case 134 but does not protect the first board case 138 is provided, and the number of resin pouring traces 192 of the first board case 138 is N4 (N4≧1). The number of traces 280 of the resin-injection portion when the cover 22 is molded may be N4+n4 (n4≧1).

In a game machine 1 having a plurality of resin parts including at least a first resin part, first extruded portion traces 281a and 281b at the time of molding arranged at a first position in the first resin part, and The traces of the second extruded portions 281a and 281b at the time of molding arranged at the two positions may be configured to have different sizes.

In this case, the first resin component is the back cover 22 made of resin that protects the back member, and the surface area of the back cover 22 is divided into a heat dissipation area 264A in which a plurality of heat dissipation holes 264 are arranged and a heat dissipation area other than the heat dissipation area 264A. When divided into the non-radiating region 264B, the number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b in the non-radiating region 264B is N5 (N5≧1), and the number of extruded portion traces 281a and 281b in the heat radiating region 264A is N5+n5 (n5≧1). 1) It is good also as a piece. The back cover 22 has a back portion 144 that protects the back member from the back side, and bent portions 145a and 145b that bend forward from the outer circumference of the back portion 144. Extruded portion traces 281a and 281b are located on the back portion 144 side and the back portion 144 side. The size may differ between the bent portions 145a and 145b.

In the game machine 1 provided with the back cover 22 made of resin for protecting the back member, the surface area of the back cover 22 is divided into a first area having a large volume and a first area with respect to the substantially central portion in the left-right direction. is divided into a second region having a smaller volume, the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 during molding in the second region is N6 (N6≧1), and the number of resin pouring portion traces 280 during molding in the first region is set to N6 (N6≧1). The number may be N6+n6 (n6≧1).

In this case, the back cover 22 has a back portion 144 that covers the back member from the back side, and bending portions 145a and 145b that bend forward from the outer circumference of the back portion 144, and the traces 280 of the resin pouring portion are arranged on the back portion 144. may When the back cover 22 is provided with bent portions 145a or 145b on both left and right sides of the back portion 144, the bent portion 145a or 145b in the first region has a longer bent length than the bent portion 145b or 145a in the second region. You may make it The back cover 22 includes a hinge means 21 that attaches one of the bent portions 145a and 145b of the first area and the second area to the game machine main bodies 2 and 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the other of the first area and the second area. A stopper (latch means) 24 may be provided for locking the bent portions 145a and 145b to the gaming machine main bodies 2 and 3 when the back cover 22 is closed.

A first member 137 and a second member 138 made of resin that protects the first member 137 so that a specific portion of the first member 137 can be visually recognized. In the gaming machine 1 having the through hole 183 in the inner side, the specific portion on the side of the first member 137 may be arranged at a position not overlapping the through hole 183 of the second member 138 and the weld lines 192a and 192b. The first member is a substrate 137 on which electronic components are mounted, and the second member is a substrate case 138 that accommodates the substrate 137. The substrate case 138 has a plurality of heat dissipation holes 183 that are through holes. It's okay. The first member is a board case 138 that houses a board 137 on which electronic components are mounted. The second member is a back cover 22 that protects the board case 138. The back cover 22 has a plurality of through holes. It may have heat radiation holes 264 . The specific portion may be an information display portion on the substrate side.

In a game machine 1 provided with a back member including a board case 138 that houses a board 137 and a back cover 22 made of resin that protects the back member so that the back member can be seen, the back cover 22 is a specific part of the board case 138 side. A trace of a resin-molded portion provided at the time of resin-molding the back cover 22 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap with the .

In that case, the board may be the main board 137 for controlling game operations, and the board case may be the first board case 138 that accommodates the main board 137 . The back cover 22 may overlap the first board case 138 , and the trace of the resin molding portion may be arranged at a position not overlapping the first board case 138 . The back cover 22 may not overlap with the first board case 138 and may protect the back members other than the first board case 138 . The traces of resin-molded portions are traces of resin pouring portions 192 and 280 during molding, or traces of extrusion portions 281a and 281b during molding.

A game machine 1 comprising a back member including a first board case 138 for housing a main board 137, a resin back cover 22 covering the back member in a visible manner, and a board management information display part 178 provided on the main board 137. 3, the back cover 22 may be provided with traces of a resin molded portion provided during molding of the back cover 22 at a position not overlapping the board management information display portion 178 .

In that case, the rear cover 22 may be arranged at a position overlapping the first board case 138 and the trace of the resin molding portion not overlapping the board management information display section 178 . The back cover 22 may have an opening for viewing the substrate management information display portion 178 . The first board case 138 may be arranged at a position not overlapping the back cover 22 , and the back cover 22 may cover back members other than the first board case 138 . The traces of the resin molding portion are traces of resin pouring portions 192, 280 and/or traces of extrusion portions 281a, 281b.

Movable means 46, 47, 97 capable of executing a plurality of actions; In the game machine 1 provided, the attention-calling information display means 122, 123, and 124 do not display actions that call the player's attention to a low degree among a plurality of actions, and display actions that call the player's attention to a high degree. You may display alert information.

In that case, the alert information may be related to a motion with a large amount of movement of the movable means among the plurality of motions. The alert information display means 122, 123, 124 may be sticky display stickers. Movable means 46, 47, 97 are provided on the front surface of the game machine main bodies 2, 3 so as to be accessible to the player, and attention calling information display means 122, 123, 124 are positioned near the movable means 46, 47, 97. You may do so.

When molding resin parts, it is necessary to use an appropriate resin material according to the conditions required for each part. For resin parts that require heat resistance, we use resin materials with excellent heat resistance. For resin parts that require transparency, we use resin materials with excellent transparency. For resin parts that require impact resistance, we use resin materials with excellent heat resistance. A resin material with excellent impact resistance is used. Conversely, for resin parts with relatively low heat resistance and impact resistance, a suitable resin material is used. For example, ABS is suitable for the back cover 22 and PC is suitable for the substrate cases 134, 136, 138, 141, 143.

It is desirable that at least a part of the back cover 22 has a shape that conforms to the peripheral member depending on peripheral conditions, such as when there is a peripheral member in the vicinity of the back cover 22 . For example, the front edge of the bent portion of the back cover 22 is processed to be uneven in the front-rear direction along the peripheral member on the front side. Further, when the ball tank 48, the guide rail 49, etc. are close to the upper side of the bent portion of the back cover 22, the upper wall of the bent portion is inclined in the vertical direction along the bottom surface of the ball tank 48 and the guide rail 49. It is processed into an uneven shape.

The number of third hinge means 21 may be two or more in the vertical direction, but the plurality of third hinge means 21 may be of the same type or of different types. The hinge shaft 147 of the third hinge means 21 may have a circular shape, an elliptical shape, or a shape similar thereto. Various changes can be made to the restricting means 149 within a range that does not impair its function.

When the hinge shaft 147 is provided with a recess, it is desirable to place the recess in a location that is not easily visible, such as being positioned in front of the hinge shaft 147 when the back cover 22 is closed. In addition, when the back cover 22 is in a state where it is impossible or difficult to attach or detach, the recess can not be visually recognized, and when the back cover 22 is opened to a predetermined angle and becomes detachable, the recess can be visually recognized. good.

When the inner rail of the guide rail 27 is molded by injection molding, when the length of the inner rail is long, or when part of other parts are provided integrally with the inner rail, a plurality of inner rails in the longitudinal direction are required. A resin pouring portion is provided at each location, but from the point of view of preventing the occurrence of weld lines, it is desirable that the number of resin pouring portions of the inner rail is one.

When heat radiation holes are provided in the back cover 22, the shape and number of the heat radiation holes are not a problem as long as they are suitable for the amount of heat radiation. In this case, it is desirable to prevent the harness arranged inside the back cover 22 from being caught in the heat radiation hole, or from protruding backward from the heat radiation hole.

For example, in the vicinity of the inner side of the heat dissipation hole, there is a harness that curves greatly toward the back cover 22 with a small radius, and if the curved portion of the harness comes close to or touches the back cover 22, the curved portion of the harness moves in the left-right direction. In the case of , the heat radiation hole is arranged in the vertical direction with respect to the left and right direction, and when the curved part of the harness is in the vertical direction, the heat radiation hole is arranged in the horizontal direction with respect to the vertical direction. It is desirable that the direction of the curved portion of the

When the back cover 22 is divided into an area where the heat radiation holes are arranged and an area where the heat radiation holes are not arranged, it is desirable to provide the resin pouring portion in the non-arrangement area or in the vicinity thereof. When the rear cover 22 is divided into an area where the heat radiation holes are arranged and an area where the heat radiation holes are not arranged, it is desirable that the number of the extruded portions is larger in the area where the heat dissipation holes are arranged. When the back cover 22 is divided into an upper part and a lower part, the number of protrusions on the upper side is arranged more in the central part than in the peripheral part, and the number of protrusions in the lower side is arranged more in the peripheral part than in the central part. .

The distance between the uppermost third hinge means 21 and the lowermost third hinge means 21 of the rear cover 22 is the uppermost latch means 24 and the lowermost latch means 24 for fixing the rear cover 22 to the inner frame 3 side. different distances from For example, the former distance is larger or smaller than the latter distance.

A game machine comprising a protective cover for protecting a heat-generating backing member, the protective cover being formed in a vertically elongated hole shape and having a plurality of heat radiation holes for radiating heat from the heat-generating backing member to the outside, It is preferable that the heat radiation hole has a first outwardly expanding portion and a second outwardly expanding portion that are outwardly expanded in opposite directions in the plate thickness direction from the intermediate boundary portion in the plate thickness direction of the protective cover.

In this case, the first outwardly spreading portion and the second outwardly spreading portion preferably have a tapered shape with a small diameter on the boundary side, and the inner peripheral surface of the first outwardly spreading portion located on the exothermic back member side of the protective cover. and the inner surface of the protective cover on the side of the heat-generating backing member are formed by It is desirable to be larger than the angle between Furthermore, the exothermic back member may be a substrate case that houses a control substrate, and the protective cover may be a back cover that protects the substrate case from the back side.

A gaming machine comprising a protective cover for protecting a heat-generating backing member, the protective cover having a plurality of heat radiation holes for radiating heat from the heat-generating backing member to the outside, wherein the heat radiation holes have a diameter larger than that of the heat-generating backing member. It is also desirable that the diameter of the side opposite the exothermic backing member is larger.

The protective cover is arranged in the vertical direction, and the heat dissipation hole may be formed in the protective cover in the front-rear direction. The heat-generating backing member includes a main board for controlling game motions and a sub-board for controlling performance motions other than the game motions, and the number or opening size of the heat radiation holes of the protective cover is arranged near the main board. The number or opening amount of the heat radiation holes arranged near the sub-board may be larger than the number or opening amount of the heat radiation holes.

A main board case for housing the main board and a sub board case for housing the sub board and arranged above the main board case are provided, and the protective cover is provided with a heat dissipation hole on the upper side in the vicinity of the sub board case. Anything is fine. The heat radiation hole has a first outwardly expanding portion and a second outwardly expanding portion which are formed in an outwardly expanding shape in opposite directions in the plate thickness direction from a boundary portion in the middle of the plate thickness direction of the protective cover, and a heat-generating backing member. The diameter of the second flare on the opposite side of the exothermic backing member may be greater than the diameter of the first flare on the side.

A game machine comprising a front door pivoted to a game machine frame via hinge means so as to be openable and closable, and locking means for locking the front door to the game machine frame in a closed state, wherein the front door is locked by the locking means. It is desirable to provide a front door stop means for stopping the front door at a stop position near the front side of the game machine frame when released.

It is desirable that the front door stopping means has a receiving member provided at the bottom of the game machine frame and receiving the front door from below. Further, it is desirable that the receiving member receives the end portion of the front door opposite to the hinge means from below. The stop position may be a half-open position of the front door.

The center of gravity of the front door is located forward of the line segment connecting the hinge means and the locking means, and the upper end of the front door opposite to the hinge means at the stop position is spaced forward from the gaming machine frame. In addition, it may exhibit a forward leaning posture in which the lower side is positioned more rearward than the upper side. A forward force acts on the upper side of the front door, and a backward force acts on the lower side of the front door. It is desirable to provide lifting means for lifting the front door onto the receiving member as the front door rotates around the hinge means when the front door is closed to the game machine frame side.

A gaming machine comprising a game part made of resin, the game part having traces of a plurality of resin pouring parts when resin poured from a plurality of resin pouring parts is merged and molded, and corresponds to a first resin pouring part. A trace of a first resin pouring portion, a trace of a second resin pouring portion corresponding to the second resin pouring portion, and a trace of a third resin pouring portion corresponding to the third resin pouring portion are provided. Traces of the 2nd resin pouring part and traces of the 3rd resin pouring part were poured from the 3rd resin pouring part between the resin poured from the 1st resin pouring part and the resin poured from the 2nd resin pouring part. It is arranged so that the resin is interrupted.

The game part is a protective cover that protects the heat-generating back member from the back side, and the protective cover includes a heat dissipation area in which a plurality of heat dissipation holes are arranged, a trace of the first resin pouring part arranged in or near the heat dissipation area, It may have traces of the second resin pouring portion and traces of the third resin pouring portion.

Between the trace of the first resin pouring portion and the trace of the second resin pouring portion, the resin from the third resin pouring portion precedes the resin from the first resin pouring portion and the resin from the second resin pouring portion. It may be provided with a resin flow guide portion for guiding.

A resin flow inhibiting portion may be provided on the opposite side of the first resin pouring portion and the second resin pouring portion to hinder the flow of the resin from each resin pouring portion to the other side. The resin flow guide part may be composed of a plate-shaped part formed in the resin flow direction between the heat dissipation holes, a thick part formed in the resin flow direction, or a rib formed substantially parallel to the resin flow direction. . The resin flow impeding portion may be configured by an opening, a thin portion, or a rib formed to intersect the resin flow direction.

A game part made of resin having a plurality of openings formed therein is provided, and the game part includes at least a first resin pouring part trace and a second resin pouring part corresponding to at least a first resin pouring part and a second resin pouring part into which resin is poured during molding. In a gaming machine having traces of a resin pouring portion, at least a first merging portion and a second merging portion where resin from the first resin pouring portion and resin from the second resin pouring portion join are provided around the opening. The resin flow condition from each resin pouring portion to the junction position of the first junction is different from the resin flow condition from each resin pouring portion to the junction position of the second junction.

The flow velocity ratio between the flow velocity on the first resin pouring part side and the flow velocity on the second resin pouring part side when the resin from each of the resin pouring parts merges at the first merging part, and from each of the resin pouring parts The flow velocity ratio between the flow velocity on the side of the first resin pouring part and the flow velocity on the side of the second resin pouring part may be different when the resins merge at the second merging part.

The game component is a protective cover that protects the heat-generating backing member from the back side, and the protective cover includes a heat radiation area having a plurality of heat radiation holes and the first junction portion disposed in or around the heat radiation area. and the second junction. A resin flow guide section is provided in the heat dissipation area or near the outside of the heat dissipation area and guides the resin from the resin pouring section in a confluence direction, and the resin flow guide section is provided from the first resin pouring section through the resin flow guide section. The resin fluidity until reaching the merging position may be different from the resin fluidity from the second resin pouring portion through the resin flow guide portion until reaching the resin merging position.

The distance from the first resin pouring portion to the resin flow guide portion may be shorter than the distance from the second resin pouring portion to the resin flow guide portion. The resin flow guide portion may be a rib projecting forward from the heat radiation area. The resin flow guide portion may be a bent portion that bends forward from the outside of the heat dissipation area.

A gaming machine comprising a resin-made game part, wherein the game part has a plurality of traces of the resin pouring part when the resin poured from the plurality of resin pouring parts is molded, There are at least first resin pouring portion traces and second resin pouring portion traces arranged on different sides around a specific portion of the component side or a specific portion of the opposing component side facing the game component, and the first resin pouring portion. A position where the resin from the first resin pouring portion and the resin from the second resin pouring portion deviate from the specific portion toward one of the resin pouring portions in the peripheral portion of the trace of the trace of the second resin pouring portion or the trace of the second resin pouring portion. It is desirable to provide a resin guiding portion for guiding the resin from the first resin pouring portion or the resin from the second resin pouring portion so that the resin is joined at the .

The resin guiding portion inhibits the flow of the resin poured from the first resin pouring portion toward the side excluding the specific portion, thereby reducing the flow rate of the resin from the first resin pouring portion toward the specific portion. It may be a flow inhibiting portion that makes the flow speed of the resin from the second resin pouring portion to the specific portion side faster than that of the resin.

The resin guiding portion guides the flow of the resin poured from the first resin pouring portion toward the specific portion, and controls the flow rate of the resin from the first resin pouring portion toward the specific portion. 2. A flow guide section may be provided that makes the flow rate of the resin from the resin pouring section to the side of the specific portion faster than that of the resin.

The game component is a protective cover that protects the back member containing the exothermic member from the back side, and the protective cover includes a heat radiation area in which a plurality of heat radiation holes are arranged, the specific portion on the side of the back member, or the protective cover. It may have traces of the first resin pouring portion and traces of the second resin pouring portion disposed on both sides of the specific portion on the side.

The flow obstruction portion may be configured by an opening. It is desirable that the flow guide part has a large cross-sectional area. The resin guide portion may include a restriction portion that restricts resin flow to one side or both sides of the resin guide portion.

<Background technology and problem 1>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board in the main body of the game machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144506. , and game parts such as winning means and movable effect means are arranged in the vicinity thereof. On the back side of the game board, a performance board case for housing a performance board for controlling various performances and a liquid crystal substrate case for housing a liquid crystal substrate for controlling the liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right sides. A main board case is arranged to accommodate a main board for.

On the front side of the game machine main body, an upper plate unit on the lower side of the game board is provided with operation means including operation buttons. is displayed. On the back side of the game machine main body, a payout means is arranged vertically on one side in the horizontal direction, and on the upper side, a ball tank for storing game balls and a game ball in the ball tank are guided to the payout means. Guide rails are arranged in the left-right direction.

On the back side of the main body of the game machine, a payout means is arranged vertically on one side in the horizontal direction, and on the upper side, a ball tank for storing game balls and a game ball in the ball tank are guided to the payout means. and guide rails are arranged in the left-right direction. Also, on the back side of the game machine main body, a power supply board case that houses a power supply board for supplying power and a payout board case that houses a payout board for controlling the payout of game balls are arranged back and forth under the main board case. It is Further, on the back side of the main body of the game machine, a back cover that protects the entire effect board case and the liquid crystal board case and the upper part of the main board case and the like from the back side is provided so that it can be attached/detached and opened/closed via hinge means.

In this type of game machine, the back cover can be opened and closed around the hinge means in consideration of the convenience of inspecting the performance board case, the liquid crystal board case, the main board case, and other back members. I am trying to remove the whole back cover depending on the situation. However, in recent years, the back member of the game machine has been forced to protrude greatly on the back side due to the expansion of the game board, liquid crystal display means, etc. on the front side and the arrangement of the movable effect means. be. Therefore, when the back member, which can be said to be three-dimensional, is to be protected by the back cover, it is not sufficient to simply protect the back member in a planar manner from the back side, and it is necessary to protect the side surfaces of the back member as well.

When removing the back cover under such circumstances, it is essential to avoid interference with the back member inside the back cover. to remove the back cover. Therefore, in such a situation, it is desired to provide a gaming machine that can prevent interference with the back member when the back cover is attached or detached.

<Background technology and problem 2>
In this type of game machine, when both the game machine main body and the back cover are made of resin, they are supported by a hinge shaft that constitutes the hinge means so as to be rotatable around the hinge shaft and to be vertically insertable and detachable. Among the hinge bearings, it is conceivable to integrally injection mold the hinge shaft with the back cover, which is the opening/closing member, and the hinge bearing with the game machine main body, which is the support member.

When the hinge shaft is molded integrally with the back cover in this manner, the diameter of the hinge shaft must be larger than the plate thickness of the back cover side in order to ensure sufficient strength of the hinge shaft. However, if the hinge shaft has a solid structure with a right cylindrical surface and its diameter is made larger than the plate thickness of the back cover side, the volume of the molten resin in the solid portion of the hinge shaft will be larger than that of the other portions. Therefore, the cooling speed of the molten resin in the central part on the hinge shaft side becomes slower than other parts, and molding distortion (shrinkage distortion) called sink marks occurs in the hinge shaft after cooling, causing deformation and deformation. It may interfere with opening and closing the cover.

If the diameter of the hinge shaft is about the same as the thickness of the back cover side, the problem of molding distortion (shrinkage distortion) during cooling of the molten resin can be resolved, but the strength of the hinge shaft itself is reduced, making it difficult to open and close the back cover. has intolerable problems.

In addition, when the hinge shaft is inserted into the hinge bearing, the frictional resistance between the hinge shaft and the hinge bearing is small in the range where the back cover cannot be removed, and the back cover can be opened and closed easily, and the back cover can be removed at a predetermined angle. When opened, the frictional resistance between the hinge shaft and the hinge bearing increases, and although the back cover can be removed, the hinge shaft does not inadvertently slip out of the hinge bearing when the back cover is not intended to be removed. It is conceivable to

In such a case, it is necessary to make the cross-sectional shape of the hinge shaft substantially elliptical. However, when the hinge shaft has a substantially elliptical cross-sectional shape, the wear of the hinge shaft and/or the hinge bearing is minimized, and the insertion and removal of the hinge shaft to and from the hinge bearing is prevented while ensuring a predetermined frictional resistance. To facilitate this, it is necessary to make the hinge shaft elastically deformable in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, in a game machine having such a configuration, it is desired to prevent the generation of molding distortion while ensuring the strength of the hinge shaft.

<Background technology and problem 3>
2. Description of the Related Art Many resin members such as operation buttons, back covers, etc., molded by injection molding are arranged in game machines. On the other hand, in the molding of a resin member, the number of resin pouring portions for pouring molten resin into a cavity in a mold greatly affects the appearance, strength, and molding efficiency of the resin member after molding. That is, if the number of resin pouring parts in the mold is reduced, weld lines and traces of resin pouring parts are reduced, so that the appearance and strength of the resin member after molding are improved. is required, and the molding efficiency is lowered, so the manufacturing cost is increased.

Conversely, if the number of resin pouring parts is increased, weld lines and traces of resin pouring parts will increase, so the appearance and strength of the resin member after molding will decrease, but it will make it easier to pour molten resin into the cavity. Molding efficiency is improved and manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Therefore, the number of resin pouring parts is determined by considering which part of the gaming machine the resin members are arranged, such as the first resin member that the player can contact and the second resin member that the player cannot contact. A balance must be found between aesthetics, strength and molding efficiency.

Therefore, in this type of game machine, it is desired to ensure a suitable balance among aesthetics, strength and molding efficiency required for the first resin member and the second resin member.

<Background technology and problem 4>
On the back side of the game machine, there are a first board case that is a main board case that houses the main board, a performance board case that houses performance boards other than the main board, and a second board that is a liquid crystal board case that houses the liquid crystal board. case is placed. Each substrate case is made of transparent resin so that the state of the substrate inside can be visually recognized.

These circuit board cases are molded by injection molding, but traces of resin pouring and weld lines lead to a decrease in visibility inside the circuit board case, and weld lines lead to a decrease in the mechanical strength of the circuit board case. There's a problem.

In addition, even among the boards used in the same game machine, the main board has a very large effect on the overall game result, so it is easy to be targeted as a target for fraud such as the illegal replacement of integrated circuit devices. The first board case that houses the board is required to have much higher visibility and mechanical strength than the second board case that houses the other sub-boards.

Therefore, in such a game machine, it is desired to improve the visibility of the first board case.

<Background technology and problem 5>
This type of game machine employs a large number of resin parts for each substrate case, back cover, and others. When manufacturing these resin parts, after the molten resin is poured into the cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold at high pressure from the resin injection part and molded, the movable mold is retracted to open the mold. An injection molding method is adopted in which the resin part is removed by pushing out the resin part using a plurality of pushing parts on the side of the movable mold.

When extruding the resin part, a plurality of extruding parts on the movable mold side are in contact with respective parts of the resin part, and simultaneously moved in the same stroke in the extruding direction to push out the resin part. Therefore, a plurality of traces of extruded portions are left at a plurality of locations corresponding to the respective extruded portions on the resin component after molding.

The resin parts such as the board case and the back cover have a concave-convex structure, and the concave-convex structure part has a draft corresponding to the amount of concaves and convexes so that it can be easily removed from the movable mold. However, even for a single resin part, there is a large difference in the degree of adhesion of the resin part to the movable mold between a part with a large uneven structure and a complicated shape and a part with a small uneven structure and a simple shape. For each target portion of the part, it is necessary to arrange an extruded portion having an optimum size for that portion at an optimum position.

Therefore, in such a game machine, it is desired to be able to arrange a push-out portion having a size suitable for each position of the resin component.

<Background technology and problem 6>
In this type of game machine, a large number of resin-made moldings such as a presentation board case and a back cover are employed. When manufacturing such a molded product, an injection method is used in which molten resin is poured into the cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold at high pressure from multiple resin pouring parts on the fixed mold side to mold into a predetermined shape. Molding method is used.

The board cases such as the performance board case and the main board case are made of colorless and transparent resin so that specific parts such as the board management information display section on the board side inside can be seen, and the back cover is made of the front side performance board case and the main board. It is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent resin so that the case and the like can be visually recognized, and a specific portion such as a substrate management information display section in each substrate case can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the electronic parts on the board include exothermic parts that generate a large amount of heat, so in order to efficiently dissipate the heat, the board case and back cover are provided with a large number of heat dissipation holes at required locations. .

However, if the circuit board case and the back cover have resin-injection traces, heat radiation holes, or the like, the light will be diffusely reflected at those portions, and visibility of specific portions will be reduced. Also, if there is a through hole such as a heat dissipation hole, a weld line will be generated downstream of the heat dissipation hole when molding the substrate case and back cover. In the case where a management information display section is arranged, there is a drawback that the visibility of the display information is lowered because the display information becomes difficult to see due to the weld line or the like formed downstream of the heat radiation hole.

Therefore, in such a game machine, it is desired to be able to prevent deterioration of visibility when viewing a specific portion on the side of the first member through the second member.

<Background technology and problem 7>
In this type of game machine, a large number of resin-made moldings such as a presentation board case and a back cover are employed. When manufacturing such a molded product, an injection method is used in which molten resin is poured into the cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold at high pressure from multiple resin pouring parts on the fixed mold side to mold into a predetermined shape. Molding method is used.

The board cases such as the performance board case and the main board case are made of colorless and transparent resin so that specific parts such as the board management information display section on the board side inside can be seen, and the back cover is made of the front side performance board case and the main board. It is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent resin so that the case and the like can be visually recognized, and a specific portion such as a substrate management information display section in each substrate case can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the electronic parts on the board include exothermic parts that generate a large amount of heat, so in order to efficiently dissipate the heat, the board case and back cover are provided with a large number of heat dissipation holes at required locations. .

However, if the circuit board case and the back cover have resin-injection traces, heat radiation holes, or the like, the light will be diffusely reflected at those portions, and visibility of specific portions will be reduced. Also, if there is a through hole such as a heat dissipation hole, a weld line will be generated downstream of the heat dissipation hole when molding the substrate case and back cover. In the case where a management information display section is arranged, there is a drawback that the visibility of the display information is lowered because the display information becomes difficult to see due to the weld line or the like formed downstream of the heat radiation hole.

Therefore, in such a game machine, it is desired to be able to prevent deterioration of visibility when viewing a specific portion on the side of the first member through the second member.

<Background technology and problem 8>
In this type of game machine, a large number of resin-made moldings such as a presentation board case and a back cover are employed. When manufacturing such a molded product, an injection molding method is employed in which molten resin is poured into a cavity between a fixed mold and a movable mold under high pressure for molding.

The board cases such as the performance board case and the main board case are made of colorless and transparent resin so that the display information of the board management information display section of the board can be viewed from the outside. It is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent resin so that display information can be visually recognized from the back side.

When resin-molding these circuit board cases and back covers, molten resin is poured into the cavity from the resin-injecting portion of the fixed mold side at high pressure, and after molding, the movable mold is retracted to open the mold. Next, the resin part is pushed out by the pushing part of the movable mold and removed. As a result, traces of resin-molded parts such as traces of resin-injected parts and extruded parts used at the time of molding remain on the substrate case and back cover.

However, since many of these resin molding traces are uneven, if the resin molding traces overlap specific parts such as the substrate or the information display section of the substrate case, the resin molding traces diffusely reflect light. Therefore, the traces of the resin-molded portion become an obstacle and the visibility of display information, etc. from the back side of the back cover is lowered.

Also, if there are heat radiation holes in the board case, back cover, etc., weld lines will be generated downstream of the heat radiation holes during molding of the board case and back cover. If the board management information display section is arranged on the side, there is a drawback that the visibility of the display information is reduced due to the weld line formed on the downstream side of the heat radiation hole.

Therefore, in such a game machine, it is desired to prevent deterioration in visibility when viewing the main portion of the back member from the back side of the back cover that protects the back member.

<Background technology and problem 9>
In this type of game machine, a large number of resin-made moldings such as a presentation board case and a back cover are employed. When manufacturing such a molded product, an injection method is used in which molten resin is poured into the cavity between the fixed mold and the movable mold at high pressure from multiple resin pouring parts on the fixed mold side to mold into a predetermined shape. Molding method is used.

The board cases such as the performance board case and the main board case are made of colorless and transparent resin so that the display information of the board management information display part of the board can be seen from the outside, and the back cover is made of board case display information or board display information. is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent resin so as to be visible from the back side.

When resin-molding these circuit board cases and back covers, molten resin is poured into the molding space between the fixed mold and the movable mold under high pressure, after which the mold is opened by retracting the movable mold. Then, the resin part is pushed out by the push-out portion on the movable mold side and removed. As a result, traces of resin-molded parts such as traces of resin-injected parts and extruded parts used at the time of molding remain on the substrate case and back cover.

However, since many of the traces of the resin molding are uneven, if the trace of the resin molding overlaps with the main part such as the display information of the substrate or the substrate case, the light will be diffusely reflected by the trace of the resin molding. The traces of the resin-molded portion become an obstacle, and the visibility of the main portion such as the display information from the back side of the back cover is lowered.

Also, if there are heat radiation holes in the board case, back cover, etc., weld lines will be generated downstream of the heat radiation holes during molding of the board case and back cover. When the substrate management information display section is arranged on the side, the display information becomes difficult to see due to the weld line or the like formed on the downstream side of the heat radiation hole, and the visibility of the display information is lowered.

Therefore, in such a game machine, the board management information display portion of the main board in the main board case is made visible through the back cover.

<Background technology and problem 10>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as described in JP-A-2018-130192, image display means is arranged in the center of the game area, and game parts such as winning means are arranged around it. A game board is provided in the game machine main body, game balls are driven into the game area to play a predetermined game, and a movable performance means is provided on the front surface of the game machine main body, and a specific game is played during the game on the game board side. In some cases, the movable effect means advances from the retracted position to the forward position, and then the movable effect means returns to the retracted position on condition that the state is established.

When the movable means such as the movable effect means and the effect operation buttons are arranged on the front side of the game machine main body, the player can directly touch the movable means. There is a risk of causing an unexpected situation such as injury due to the movable means. In order to prevent such an unforeseen situation from occurring, a display sticker displaying the attention-calling information or other attention-calling information display means is placed at a place where the player can easily check it, and the attention-calling information is displayed. It is desirable to call the player's attention directly or indirectly by the attention-calling information displayed on the means.

However, when the movable means performs a plurality of motions, if all of the alerting information for each motion is displayed on the alerting information display means, the effectiveness of the alerting effect by displaying the alerting information is rather reduced. There is a risk of That is, even if a display sticker or the like is attached to the front surface of the game machine main body, the area of the attachment area is limited, and the size of the display sticker cannot be increased without limit. Therefore, in the case of a movable means that performs a plurality of actions, if attention-calling information is displayed for each action for all of the plurality of actions, the display of each attention-calling information becomes too small for the player to confirm. Therefore, the effect of alerting the user by displaying the alerting information on the display sticker is rather reduced.

In such a game machine, it is desirable to be able to prevent deterioration of the attention calling effect due to the display of the attention calling information display means even though the movable means performs a plurality of actions.

<Background technology and problem 11>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board in the main body of the game machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144506. , and game parts such as winning means and movable effect means are arranged in the vicinity thereof.

On the back side of the game board, a performance board case for housing a performance board for controlling various performances and a liquid crystal substrate case for housing a liquid crystal substrate for controlling the liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right sides. A main board case is arranged to accommodate a main board for.

In addition, on the back side of the main board case, a power supply board case that houses a power supply board for power supply and a payout board case that houses a payout board for controlling the payout of game balls are arranged in front and behind the lower side of the main board case. It is Further, on the back side of the main body of the game machine, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the entire effect board case and the liquid crystal board case and the upper part of the main board case from the back side is provided so that it can be attached/detached and opened.

On the back of the back cover, a large number of heat dissipation holes such as long holes and round holes are formed to dissipate heat from exothermic parts such as the performance board case and the liquid crystal board case. The heat from the heat-generating components inside the back cover is radiated to the outside.

Conventional back cover heat dissipation holes are tapered with a smaller diameter at the outer (rear side) or inner (front side) open end, and extend in one direction over the entire length of the back cover in the plate thickness direction. tapered holes. In the back cover having a single taper-shaped heat radiation hole, when looking at the angle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole at the outer peripheral edge of the small-diameter side open end and the back or front surface of the back cover, There are two types, one with a small angle and one with a large angle.

If the angle formed by the back surface of the back cover and the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole is made small, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole is tilted and the inclination angle becomes large, resulting in the gap between the heat radiation hole forming part of the mold and the back cover. Since the release resistance is reduced, the release of the molded back cover from the mold is facilitated, which has the advantage of improving the production efficiency of the back cover and preventing deformation of the back cover during release.

However, if the angle formed is small, the outer peripheral portion of the small-diameter side opening edge of the heat dissipation hole becomes thin, so the rigidity of the formation area of the heat dissipation hole on the back cover decreases, and the small-diameter side opening edge of the heat dissipation hole is not When the back cover comes into contact with a member or the like, the contact portion is damaged and looks white, and the appearance of the back cover as a whole is significantly deteriorated. Also, if the edge of the opening on the small diameter side of the heat radiation hole is thin and sharp, there is a risk of injury due to the sharp portion during work.

On the other hand, if the angle formed by the back surface of the back cover and the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole is increased, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole stands upright and the angle of inclination becomes small, so the rigidity of the area where the heat radiation hole is formed in the back cover increases. In addition to the improvement, there is an advantage that damage to the small diameter side opening edge and injury due to the small diameter side opening edge can be prevented.

However, if the angle formed is large, the inner peripheral surface of the heat radiation hole will stand upright, increasing the mold release resistance between the molded part of the heat radiation hole of the mold and the back cover. There is a problem that it takes a long time to remove the mold and the production efficiency of the back cover is lowered, and the back cover is likely to be deformed when the mold is released. Therefore, it is desired to provide a game machine with a protective cover that can prevent deterioration of productivity, safety and durability.

<Background technology and problem 12>
As shown in JP-A-2019-171203, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a rectangular frame-shaped outer frame fixed to a game island, and is supported by hinge means on the outer frame so as to be freely openable and closable around a vertical axis. It comprises an inner frame and a front door supported by hinge means on the inner frame so as to be openable and closable around a vertical axis. A game board is detachably attached to the inner frame.

The front door is provided with a viewing window through which the game area of the game board can be visually recognized, an upper unit arranged above the viewing window, and a lower unit arranged below the viewing window. The upper unit is provided with decoration means such as light emission effect means, and the lower unit is provided with an upper tray for storing game balls for shooting, effect operation means for operation effect, and the like. The front door is pivotally supported by hinge means at one end on the right and left sides so as to be freely opened and closed, and can be locked to the inner frame in the closed state by locking means on the other end side.

In a game machine with a large upper unit, the center of gravity of the entire front door side moves forward greatly, so compared to a game machine without an upper unit, the front door is rotated around the hinge means in the opening direction. A large moment is generated. Therefore, not only when the key hole is on the inner frame side, but also when the key hole is on the front door side, when the operation key is inserted into the key hole to open the front door and the locking means is released, The moment causes the front door to suddenly open forward around the hinge means, which may cause an unexpected situation for the manager of the game hall or the players near the front side of the front door. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the front door from being suddenly opened when the locking means is released.

<Background technology and problem 13>
As described in JP-A-2016-144506, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board in the main body of the game machine, and a liquid crystal display constituting an image display means in the central part of the game area of the game board. Game parts such as winning means and movable effect means are arranged around the means (Patent Document 1).

On the back side of the game board, a performance board case for housing a performance board for controlling various performances and a liquid crystal substrate case for housing a liquid crystal substrate for controlling the liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right sides. A main board case is arranged to accommodate a main board for.

In addition, on the back side of the main board case, a power supply board case that houses a power supply board for power supply and a payout board case that houses a payout board for controlling the payout of game balls are arranged in front and behind the lower side of the main board case. It is Further, on the back side of the main body of the game machine, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the performance board case, the liquid crystal board case, etc. from the back side is provided so as to be removable and openable.

A large number of heat radiation holes such as elongated holes are formed on the back of the back cover to dissipate heat from exothermic back parts such as the performance board case and the liquid crystal board case. The heat from the heat-generating parts inside is radiated to the outside.

This type of back cover is manufactured by an injection molding method in which molten resin is poured into a molding space of a mold for molding. When injection-molding a large back cover, in order to shorten the molding time and improve the molding efficiency, three or more resin pouring parts are arranged, and each resin pouring part flows into the molding space of the mold. A method in which resin is poured into and molded at approximately the same time is adopted.

However, when resin is poured from a plurality of resin pouring parts into the molding space of the mold at approximately the same time, and the resin from each resin pouring part is merged and molded in the molding space, the number of resin pouring parts is weld lines are generated, and the three weld lines may merge at one point.

It is now assumed that there are three resin pouring parts, ie, first to third resin pouring parts, and the resins poured from each resin pouring part are the first to third resins. When the first to third resins are poured substantially simultaneously from the first to third resin pouring parts, depending on the fluidity of the resin around each resin pouring part, the first resin poured from the first resin pouring part Then, the second resin poured from the second resin pouring part merges, and then the third resin poured from the third resin pouring part merges with the first resin and the second resin, and the first resin ~ Three weld lines are generated at the confluence portion of the third resin, and the three weld lines may merge at one point.

Therefore, when molding by pouring resin from three resin pouring parts, the number of weld lines may be three depending on the relative positional relationship of the resin pouring parts and the resin fluidity of the peripheral part of each resin pouring part. Since the three weld lines join at one point, the strength of the back cover is greatly reduced at that portion.

Therefore, when molding a game part such as a protective cover by pouring resin from three or more resin pouring parts, the number of weld lines generated by the confluence of the resin poured from each resin pouring part is reduced, and It is desirable to be able to prevent weld lines from crossing each other at one point.

<Background technology and problem 14>
As described in JP-A-2016-144506, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board in the main body of the game machine, and a liquid crystal display constituting an image display means in the central part of the game area of the game board. Game parts such as winning means and movable effect means are arranged around the means (Patent Document 1).

On the back side of the game board, a performance board case for housing a performance board for controlling various performances and a liquid crystal substrate case for housing a liquid crystal substrate for controlling the liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right sides, and a game control is provided below them. A main board case is arranged to accommodate a main board for. In addition, on the back side of the main board case, a power supply board case that houses a power supply board for power supply and a payout board case that houses a payout board for controlling the payout of game balls are arranged in front and behind the lower side of the main board case. It is Furthermore, on the back side of the game machine body, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the performance board case, the liquid crystal board case, etc. from the back side is provided so as to be removable and openable.

A large number of heat radiation holes such as elongated holes are formed on the back of the back cover to dissipate heat from exothermic back parts such as the performance board case and the liquid crystal board case. The heat from the heat-generating parts inside is radiated to the outside.

When injection-molding the back cover, which has a large number of heat dissipation holes arranged vertically and horizontally in the heat dissipation area, the heat dissipation holes hinder the flow of the resin. The molding efficiency is improved by dispersing and arranging the resin and pouring the resin into the mold from each resin pouring portion.

However, if such a molding method is adopted, there is a problem that the strength of the back cover is reduced due to weld lines generated by the resin poured from each resin pouring portion joining around the heat radiation hole. For example, when arranging the resin pouring portions on both the left and right sides of a group of heat dissipation holes where a large number of heat dissipation holes are concentrated, if the resin pouring portions on the left and right sides are arranged symmetrically with respect to a specific heat dissipation hole, Weld lines, which are generated when the resin poured from the resin pouring portion merges at the confluence portions on both upper and lower sides of a specific heat dissipation hole, may line up on a straight line in the vertical direction. If the weld lines on both the upper and lower sides of the specific heat radiation hole are formed linearly in this manner, the strength of the back cover may be greatly reduced by the weld lines.

Therefore, when the resin poured from a plurality of resin pouring parts is joined around the opening for molding, the weld line generated around the opening is offset in the direction of resin flow, thereby preventing a decrease in strength. It is desirable to

<Background technology and problem 15>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board in the main body of the game machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144506. , and game parts such as winning means and movable effect means are arranged in the vicinity thereof.

On the back side of the game board, a performance board case for housing a performance board for controlling various performances and a liquid crystal substrate case for housing a liquid crystal substrate for controlling the liquid crystal display means are arranged on the left and right sides. A main board case is arranged to accommodate a main board for.

Also, on the back side of the game machine main body, a power supply board case that houses a power supply board for supplying power and a payout board case that houses a payout board for controlling the payout of game balls are arranged back and forth under the main board case. It is Further, on the back side of the main body of the game machine, a back cover (protective cover) that protects the performance board case, the liquid crystal board case, etc. from the back side is provided so as to be removable and openable.

A large number of heat radiation holes such as elongated holes are formed on the back of the back cover to dissipate heat from exothermic back parts such as the performance board case and the liquid crystal board case. The heat from the heat-generating parts inside is radiated to the outside.

When injection-molding a back cover in which a large number of heat dissipation holes are arranged vertically and horizontally in a heat dissipation area, resin is injected from a plurality of resin pouring parts such as first and second resin pouring parts arranged in or around the heat dissipation area. Pour and mold at approximately the same time.

For example, when the first and second resins are poured from the first and second resin pouring parts, the first and second resins flow toward the outer circumference of each resin pouring part while resisting the flow resistance of the surrounding molding space. , and merge at the intermediate portions between the respective resin pouring portions, resulting in weld lines at the merging portions.

If this weld line is generated corresponding to the visual recognition part where the component information of the electronic components on the control board in the board case is visually recognized, it becomes difficult to read the component information from the visual recognition part, and the narrow space between the openings becomes difficult. If it occurs in a narrowed portion, there are problems such as a reduction in the mechanical strength of the narrowed portion. Therefore, when designing the back cover, it is necessary to arrange the weld line at a position away from the specific portion where visibility or mechanical strength is required.

Therefore, it is desirable to be able to dispose the weld line generated by the confluence of the resins poured from the plurality of resin pouring portions at a position away from the specific portion.

1 game machine 2 outer frame (game machine body)
3 Inner frame (game machine body)
20 back cover 21 third hinge means 22 back cover (protective cover, game part)
22D lower part (first area)
22U upper part (second area)
22L hinge side portion 22R opposite hinge side portion 24 latch means 48 sphere tank 49 guide rail 56 lower unit 57, 58 first and second upper units 64 operation button 66 vibrating means 67 rotating light emitting means 68 body 68a notch (flow obstruction)
70 operation part (operation top part)
73, 74 First and second locking means 90, 192, 207, 217, 252, 280 Resin pouring portion traces 91a, 91b, 281a Pushing portion traces 98 Engaging means 99 Fastening means 114 Movable effect body 114A Origin position 114B Advance position 114C Protruding position 114D Storage position 118 Operation part 118A Origin position 118B Advance position 120-124 First to fifth alert display means 133 Effect board 134 Effect board case (heat generating backing member)
135 liquid crystal substrate 136 liquid crystal substrate case (heat generating backing member)
137 main board 138 main board case 140 power supply board 141 power supply board case 142 payout board 143 payout board case 144 rear surface portions 145a, 145b, 145c, 145d bending portion 147 hinge shaft 148 hinge bearing 149 restricting means 167 recesses 174, 195, 210, 235 Integrated circuit device 176 Operating means 178, 200, 213, 239 Board management information display units 179, 199, 212, 240 Component information display units 183, 204, 214, 233, 243, 264, 400 Heat dissipation holes (openings)
184, 246 opening history marking means 188, 248 opening history marking seals 192a, 192b, 208a, 208b, 216a, 216b, 251a, 251b, 283 weld line 294 first restricting means 295 second restricting means 264A heat radiation area 264B non-heat radiation area 302 Boundary portion 302a Stepped portions 303, 304 First and second outward spreading portions 303a, 304a Inner peripheral surface 303b Inner opening end 304b Outer opening end 303w, 304w Opening amount 307, 308 Upper, lower First hinge mechanism 309, 310 Upper , Lower Second Hinge Mechanism 319 Locking Housing Sections 323, 328 First and Second Receiving Tools 324, 329 First and Second Hooks 333 Release Operation Mechanism 345 Linking Members 359, 360 First and Second Lifting Means 361 Front Door Stop means 362 Receiving member 363 Lower surface member G1, G2 First and second resin pouring parts G11, G21 First and second resin pouring part marks g1, g2 First and second resin R1 to R3 First to third merging parts WL1 to WL3 First to third weld lines C3 Resin flow guide portions C3-1, C3-2 First and second resin flow guide portions 391 Board information display means (specific portion)
398, 407 to 409, 419, 424 to 426 flow obstruction part 410 narrow passage (specific part)

Claims (1)

Equipped with a protective cover that protects the exothermic backing material,
In a game machine in which the protective cover has a plurality of heat radiation holes formed in a vertically elongated shape for radiating heat from the exothermic backing member to the outside,
The heat radiating hole includes a first outwardly expanding portion formed outwardly in the thickness direction from an intermediate boundary portion in the plate thickness direction of the protective cover toward the exothermic backing member side, and a heat-generating backing member and a second outwardly expanding portion formed outwardly in the plate thickness direction to the opposite side;
A gaming machine, wherein the first outwardly spreading portion and the second outwardly spreading portion are arranged adjacent to each other in the plate thickness direction via the boundary portion.

Images